Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement
• LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

• •

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2
Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12
Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14
Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

i

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19
State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29
Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45
Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46
Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47
Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48
Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49
Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51
Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56
Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo™ Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60
Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63
Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68
Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70
Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71
Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75
Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

................................................11 or higher) v ....................................... 103 Adding an Icon to a Button...................................................................... 94 Deleting Popup Pages From a Project ............................ 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page................................ 107 TPDesign4 (v2........................... 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages .................................... 97 Drawing a Button...................................................................................................... 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages ........................................................ 100 Foreign Language Support for Text ...................................... 93 Creating Popup Page Groups ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 102 Adding a Bitmap to a Button ............................................ 94 Pasting Popup Pages....................................................................................... 95 Working With Buttons ............................ 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page ......................... 89 Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ...........................Table of Contents Working With Popup Pages ................. 107 Page Flips ....................................... 85 Creating a Popup Page...................................................................................................................................................................................... 106 Displaying a Video Source on a Button......................................................... 87 Setting Popup Page Properties ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool............................................................................................................... 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ..................................... 100 Specifying a Button Border..................85 Overview ................................................................................................. 90 Renaming a Popup Page..................................................................................................................................................... 88 Setting General Properties: Popup Pages........................................................ 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page ......................... 100 Adding Text to a Button ............................. 99 Specifying the Button Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 97 Button Draw Tools ..................................................... 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages.....97 Overview ................................. 94 Copying Popup Pages . 104 Working With Transparent Backgrounds........ 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ........................................................................................................................................................................... 102 Changing the Button Fill Color................................................................................................................................................................................... 98 Generated Button Names ....................................................................... 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107 Adding Text Effects .......................... 101 Adding a Fill Color To a Button ................................

........................................................ 120 Joystick Buttons................................................ 117 Formatting Codes .............. 124 TakeNote Buttons.......................................................................................... 129 Previewing a Button ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112 Setting Properties: General Buttons ............................................................................................................................. 118 Working With Touch Maps ..................................................................................................................... 130 Creating a Date Button....... 116 Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons................................. 131 vi TPDesign4 (v2..... 110 Editing Button Properties ........................................................................ 117 Creating a Custom Slider ................. 110 Copying Buttons. 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips ............................. 110 Pasting Buttons ......................................................................... 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features .................................................................................................... 111 General Buttons ........................................................... 109 Page Flip Actions................................. 122 Input Mask Characters......................................................................................................................................................11 or higher) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128 Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog ..................................................... 127 Size Assist toolbar .................... 109 Copying/Pasting Buttons ..................................................................................................................................................................... 114 Bargraph Buttons.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 123 Computer Control Buttons ................. 124 Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ...... 116 Slider Types.................................................................................. 111 Editing Multiple Selections.............................................................................. 121 Text Input Buttons ............................ 125 Setting Default New Button Parameters .......................................................... 123 Input Mask Ranges ........................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ........ 112 Multi-State General Buttons .............................. 127 Position Assist toolbar.................................................................................................................. 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons .......................................................... 113 Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons ...... 121 Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons .............................................................. 123 Input Mask Operators .................................................................................................... 125 Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons ......................................Table of Contents Creating a Page Flip ........................................................................ 113 Level Control Parameters ................................................................................................ 127 Order Assist toolbar ...........................

.............................................135 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144 List Box Container Properties vs................................................................................. 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs .................................................................................. 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ............................. 143 Deleting Columns.................. 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ............................................................................................. 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons...................................................................................................... 142 Adding Columns........................................................... 153 List Box Buttons .........Resizing..................................................................................................................................... 148 List Box Buttons .....................................................................................................................................11 or higher) vii ............................................................................ 136 Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................Columns........ 149 List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 154 TPDesign4 (v2.................. 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels ...................................139 Overview ....................... 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons........................................................................... 152 List Box Buttons .Z-Order .............................................................................. 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns ....................................... 144 List Box Buttons .....Table of Contents Creating a Time Button....................Subordinate Buttons ........................................................................................ 136 Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons . Copying and Pasting a List Box ............................ 154 Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons ................................................................................................................................ 135 External Button Options ............................................................................... 132 Working With External Controls ....................... 147 Subordinate Buttons ...... Column Properties................................ 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode ............Drag and Drop Capability................................. 138 Working With List Box Buttons ..................................Container Button.............................................................. 141 Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) ............. 143 Cutting.................................. 143 Deleting Rows .................................... 140 List Box Toolbar....................................................................... 141 Adding Rows ........................................................................................................................................................................ 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................................................................ 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) .......... 147 Subordinate Button Placement ................................................................... 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode........................................................................ 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties.......................... 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons ........... 146 List Box Buttons ............................................................... 150 Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons .........................

...................................................... 177 Saving a Properties Set .................................................................................................................................................. 179 Border Style .................................................................................................................................................................. 180 Compression..................................................................................................... 154 Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ........................................................................ 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar..................................................................................................... 166 Command Structure List View .. 179 Color Depth................... 157 Navigation Buttons . 158 List Data Table ................................................................ 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button ..........................................................Navigation Buttons ........ 179 Column Display Order .................................................................................. 159 Static List Box Data .......................................Channel Code Values ..................... 163 Deleting a List Data Table ...................................... 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons ............................................................................................................................................11 or higher) ......................................................................................................................................................................................................175 Overview ...................................................................................................Table of Contents List Box Buttons ............ 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar..................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Down ................................. 157 Scroll Bar Components ..................................................................................... 158 List Data Table Properties ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 175 Using the Apply To All option ............................ 175 Drag and Drop Support ................................................................................................................... 179 Auto-Repeat .............................................................. 167 Dynamic List box Table Example ....................................................................... 179 Column Sort Order ..................................................................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Up................................................................................................................................................. 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 159 Dynamic List Box Data................................ 172 Working With Properties ....................... 160 Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button ......................................................................................................................... 164 Data List Commands ........................................................ 160 Creating a Static List Data Table........................................................................... 180 Cursor Color .................................................................................... 164 Data List Command Rules..................................................... 164 Creating a Dynamic List Data Table .................................... 180 viii TPDesign4 (v2................................................... 180 Cursor Name ................................................. 176 Working With The Property Painter............................................................................................ 179 Above Popups ..................................... 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button........................................ 178 General Properties............................

............................................................. 182 List Column ...................................................................................................................................... 185 Password Character ......................... 185 Reset Pos......................................................Table of Contents Description........................... 186 Show Effect Time ................................................................... 185 Password ....................................................................................... 182 List Column Padding ............................................................................. 186 Scale To Fit.............................................. 183 List Filter Column ........................ 181 Input Mask .......... 185 Password Protection .................................................................................................................................. 185 Remote Host ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 182 List Table Port ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183 List Managed................................................... 184 List Row Height .................................................................................................. 181 Hide Effect ...................... 184 List Row Padding................... 183 List Preferred Row ............... 184 Lock Button Name........................................................................................................................ 185 Modal ........................................ 180 Height ................................................................................................................................... 185 Max Text Length ....... 184 List Preferred Row Height.............................................................. 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 Hide Effect Time .. 182 List Display ........................... 185 Page Flip ................................................................................................................ 184 List Selectable ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180 Disabled ...................................................11 or higher) ix ........................................................................................................................ 183 List Offset Enabled............................ On Show ........................................................ 185 Name......................... 180 Display Type........................................................................................................ 186 TPDesign4 (v2........................................................................... 181 Hidden ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 180 Group .......................................................... 184 List Row............................... 186 Show Effect .............................. 185 Remote Port................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 182 List Table Address............................................................................. 181 Left....................................................................................... 183 List Table Wrap ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................. 189 Command Output ............................................................................................................................. 191 Range High............................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range Low.............................................. 191 State Properties...................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time ............................................................................................................................ 192 Bitmap....................................................................................................................................................... 190 Level Control Value ................................................................... 190 Level Function .............................................. 189 Feedback................................................................ 187 Timeout .................................................................................11 or higher) ......................................................................................... 186 Slider Name..................................................................... 189 Address Port ........................................................................................... 186 TakeNote Enabled........................................................................................................... 191 String Output .................................................................................................. 186 Slider Color ........ 188 Programing Properties.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 187 TakeNote Port............................................................................................. 187 TakeNote Host ........................... 189 Level Code ........................................................................ 191 String Output Port .............. 187 Touch Style.......................................................................................................................................................................... 190 Range Drag Increment ..................................................... 189 Level Aux................................................................................................... 189 Command Port .............................................................................. 188 Width................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 190 Range Aux Inverted............................... 191 Range Time Up .................................................................................................................................... 189 Channel Code .......... 189 Channel Port............... 187 Touch Map............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 Type ........ 190 Level Port .................................................... 190 Level Control Type ....Table of Contents Show Effect X/Y Pos............................................................................................ 188 Value Direction........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range Inverted ................ 191 Range Time Down .......................................................... 187 Top ... 192 x TPDesign4 (v2.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Address Code.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 186 State Count ........................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 Chameleon Image .................................................................................. 192 Bitmap Y Offset.................... 201 State Manager Window .................................................................................. 195 Text Justification ...................................................................................... 195 Streaming Source ................................................................................................................................................. 193 Icon X Offset .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 194 Marquee Repeat . 196 Video Cropping......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 Border Color ............. 194 Sound ............................................................................................................................. 203 TPDesign4 (v2....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Effect....................................................................................................................................................................................... 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru ................................................................................................... 202 Duplicating an Existing State on the Button ........................... 192 Draw Order ................................................................ 195 Text X Offset.............................. 194 Overall Opacity ......... 192 Bitmap X Offset ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Y Offset................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 193 Icon Justification ....................... 201 State Manager Context Menu ... 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit ...................... 193 Font................................................................................................................................... 193 Icon Slot ............................ 196 Video Fill ........................................ 196 Using the All States Option ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 202 Adding States From the Clipboard ................... 193 Fill Color................................................................... 195 Text Color ................................................................................................... 195 Text ..................................................................................................................... 196 Searching For Button Properties ............................... 193 Icon Y Offset .................................................................. 193 Marquee Direction ..............................................................Table of Contents Bitmap Justification......................... 192 Border Name............................................................................................................................................................................................................11 or higher) xi .... 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties . 198 Working With States ................................................................................................... 196 Word Wrap.... 195 Text Effect Color .........................................................................201 Overview .......... 201 Adding States To a Button ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

................. 217 Copying Palette Entries.............................................. 204 Deleting States... 203 Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button ............................................................................................. 218 Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program....... 215 Creating Custom Palettes..............................................................................................11 or higher) ............... 205 Copying a State to the Clipboard................................................... 208 0......................................................................... 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) .............................................................................................................................................................. 215 Working With Multiple Color Palettes................................................................................................... 215 Creating New Palette Entries .................................................................................................. Popup Page or Button ............................................................................................................................................... 217 Copying Palettes ........................................................ 208 Function Codes ............................................................ 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign).................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 208 Function Code Map .................................................................................... 205 Reordering States Through the Clipboard .................................................................. 206 Working With Function Codes ... 205 Copying/Pasting States From a Page............................ 217 Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ............................................................... 217 Exporting Palette Files .................. 205 Changing the Order Of States On A Button .......................................................................... 216 Renaming Palettes.............................................................................................................................................................207 Overview ...... 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop ............................................................ 217 Importing Palette Files .......................................................................................................... 210 Assign Codes........................................................................................................................................................................ 213 Working With Palettes ................................... 204 Removing States From A Button..................................................................................................... 218 xii TPDesign4 (v2..................................................... 205 Draw Order (Z-Order) ............................... 206 Changing the Draw Order for Selected States............................... 207 Show/Hide Function Codes.................................................................................. 210 Clear Channels First...................................................................................... 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) ....................... 209 Using Power Assign .......................213 Working With Colors.. 211 Working With Colors and Palettes ... 216 Changing the Active Palette............. 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Limitations........................................................ 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard...................................Setup Port....Table of Contents Drag & Drop To Add States ............................................................................................................

219 Overview .............223 Overview ........Appearance (Step 5 of 6) ........................................... 233 Secure NetLinx Connections .............................................................................. 220 Working With Animation Effects ..............................Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ..............................................................233 Overview ........... 226 Creating Animated Bitmap Effects........................ 238 Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master............................................................................................ 223 Animation Wizard .............................. 223 Using the Animation Wizard .............. 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port ........................ 231 File Transfer Operations ................... 238 TPDesign4 (v2.................................... 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP ............. 237 Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master............Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) ..................................................................Table of Contents Working With Video Fills .............................. 228 Chameleon Images ................ 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 228 Tweeners sub-menu .................................................................................................................................... 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem.. 225 Animation Wizard .... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP ......................................................................................................................... 224 Animation Wizard ................................................................................................................................. 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ...................................................................... 223 Animation Wizard ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button ............... 229 Working With Chameleon Images ...................................................... 219 Streaming Video Fills ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration.....................................................Finish (Step 6 of 6) ............................. 230 Chameleon Images......................................................................................................Example ........................................................................Select Type (Step 1 of 6)..................... 225 Tweening ................................11 or higher) xiii ................. 225 Creating Color Transition Effects ......... 224 Animation Wizard ............................................................................................... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master .................. 234 Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations ................. 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page....................... Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder........ 233 Working With Communications Configurations ............................................................................................................ 229 Requirements for Chameleon Images ................................. 227 Creating Animated Text Effects .............................................................. 223 Animation Wizard .............................................. 230 Working With Chameleon Images ......................Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) .........................................................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241
Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243
Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247
Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256
Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265
Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267
Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269
Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277
Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)
Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11
Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000® (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP® Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages
Windows XP® Professional / Windows 2000®: • English (US) • French • German • Spanish Windows Vista-Business®: • Chinese (Classic, HK) • French • Japanese • Spanish • English • Chinese (Simplified, PRC) • Arabic • German • Turkish • Greek • Italian • Portuguese • Flemish (Dutch) • Russian • Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

1

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft® IntelliMouse® doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions
Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero® Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero® VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

2

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)
Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx® Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions
While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 • MVP-7500 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO-DVI • MVP-5150 • MVP-5200i • CV5 • MVP-8400i • MVP-8400 800x600 • 1200V • 1200VG • 1500VG 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB • CA12 • CV12 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

3

Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 • 1920x1200 4 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .11 or higher) Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont. Supported Screen Resolutions .NXI-TPI/4 TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 Supported Screen Resolutions .TPDesign4 (v2.TPI-PRO TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface .) Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 • TPI-PRO-DVI • 1700VG • CV17 • NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.

These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels. These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi TPDesign4 (v2. Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs.11 or higher) Supported Screen Resolutions .TPI-PRO-DVI TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 720x480 CEA • 720x576 CEA • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x720 VESA • 1280x720 CEA • 1280x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 VESA • 1920x1080 CEA • 1920x1200 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs. Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities. These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite. it also supports Composite video (only).TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 5 .

TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files.amx. since they are usually slightly smaller in size.com: NetLinx Studio NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems.11 or higher) AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release). Unless you are actually using transparency.11 or higher) . only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions.com. Related Software Applications The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www. This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i True Type Font Support Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF). 6 TPDesign4 (v2. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4.amx. as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs. Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab). NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details.

returns a listing of available updates. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder. For example. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application.com. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option.11 or higher) 7 .PB4). allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating. TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www. and to generally fine-tune the project as needed. the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project. To preview your panel project. launches the installation of those downloads. If not found. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. G4 PanelBuilder G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. and upon request. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*. or user-designed templates. allows a user to download the selected installation files.TPT). and must be installed separately.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately. TPDesign4 (v2. For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information. determines the latest version of the selected applications.VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design.com. it is fully integrated with TPD4.11 or higher) AMX WebUpdate The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website.TPDesign4 (v2.amx. refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help.amx. G4 PanelPreview G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX.

11 or higher) .TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 8 TPDesign4 (v2.

TPDesign4 (v2.Lists the name of the active Project file. Window. Workspace Window . These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. Layout.Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects. Click View. but can be moved.You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). 1): Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Window Design View Windows Properties Window State Manager Window Status Bar FIG. and Help).Contains the main menu options (File. Menu Bar .Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page.11 or higher) 9 . and their pages and popup pages. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. from top to bottom. If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu. When this option is enabled. The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. a tab is displayed for each open page. Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. Edit. Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project. Design View Windows .The TPDesign4 Work Area The TPDesign4 Work Area Overview The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG. left to right. Toolbars . the main components are: Title Bar . States. 1 TPDesign4 Work Area In its default configuration. then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars). then it is displayed. Page. Tools. Panel. Transfer. so they'll apply the next time the application is launched. Button. View. These settings are saved.

toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open).Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. Feedback and Initial page file target information. 3). and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view. State Manager Window . The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master. Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves. FIG. panel revision.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Window . Address code.By default. They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. FIG. a tab is displayed for each open page. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. Top. Status Bar . but can be moved. Design View Windows Design View windows (FIG. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left. button size.11 or higher) . the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position. you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. When this option is enabled. Alternatively. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. Width or Height properties. Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. 2 Design View windows The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button. the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties. 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar) Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). but can be moved. 10 TPDesign4 (v2. and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information.Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. Level code. you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu.

and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option. Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu. Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object. If you open more than 10 pages. In TPD4. containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back. only the view is closed.The TPDesign4 Work Area TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. the tabs automatically disappear. TPDesign4 (v2. these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs". By default. by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu. most 21” monitors typically have between a 19. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object. center. If you open more than 15 pages. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected. align. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page. etc). Using the Zoom Controls The Zoom toolbar (FIG. only the way it is represented in the workspace area. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. For example. you must first specify the monitor’s visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog). To use this option. The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image. once you have several pages open. as opposed to the monitor’s overall diagonal size. No data will be lost. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. This menu is identical to the Layout menu. containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View.5” and 20” viewable area. 4 Zoom toolbar The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size. Design View Window tab controls Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing.11 or higher) 11 . FIG. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window. accessible from the main menu bar.

5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar) Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu. 50%. 6 Workspace window 12 TPDesign4 (v2. or by Fit Page. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. 150%. without zooming the entire design view. 200% or 400%). and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. FIG. Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window. 100%.400% (in 1-percent increments). Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. This floating window is resizable and dockable. where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. For Width or Fit Height. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog. 75%.The TPDesign4 Work Area Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list. Magnifier Window The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%. where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 .11 or higher) . 6): FIG.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 13 . Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu.Pages Tab Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. Each open Project is represented by a folder. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. 7 Workspace Navigator . in the Workspace Navigator. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Navigator . and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. Click the + symbol next to the folders. 7): FIG. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time.

Programming and States: 14 TPDesign4 (v2. and within Port by Code. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. Level codes. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace.11 or higher) . popup page and button properties. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG.Function Maps Tab This list is sorted by Port. FIG. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page.The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Window. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. 8). the selected button is named "pause". and the button type is general. Address codes. 8 Workspace Window. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected.

Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case.General Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). Depending on the item selected. FIG. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. TPDesign4 (v2. the value is copied to the new location.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. and drag it to another field. select from a drop-down menu.11 or higher) 15 . General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. When you release the mouse button. and the original value is left unchanged. With an item selected. click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. General buttons). you can either set the item manually. or both. 9 Properties Control . 9). or the Page itself). and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control .

and drag it to another field. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. select from a drop-down menu. 10 Properties Control .Programming Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. you can either set the item manually. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Depending on the item selected. or both.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . FIG. the value is copied to the new location. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. or the Page itself). and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. With an item selected. similar to the General tab. This information is displayed in a table format.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. 10). When you release the mouse button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) . 16 TPDesign4 (v2. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). and the original value is left unchanged.

States Tab To edit any of the listed button properties.11 or higher) 17 . 11 Properties Control . and the original value is left unchanged. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. you can either set the item manually. FIG. This information is displayed in a table format. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. select from a drop-down menu. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. or the Page itself). the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). similar to the General tab. and drag it to another field. or both. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. 0. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. 11). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. When you release the mouse button. the value is copied to the new location. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. With an item selected. Depending on the item selected. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). TPDesign4 (v2.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG.

located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. When you have multiple buttons selected. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus.The TPDesign4 Work Area Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. FIG. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window.11 or higher) . In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. 18 TPDesign4 (v2. These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. but not on multiple states for a single button. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). provided that the change can be applied to them all. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. 12 Apply To All toggle button If the Apply To All button is not depressed. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. 12). the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. and you select more than one button to act on. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected.

the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab). The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. and does not represent distortion on the button itself. Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state. which includes options to Add single or multiple states. 13). in the Properties Control window (States tab). TPDesign4 (v2. For Multi-General buttons. Insert. FIG. To display the State Manager window. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu. popup page or button to be set. For Multi-Bargraph buttons. insert single or multiple states. Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button. and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). select View > State Manager. Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities. Select a Page. replace states. This is only a result of the scaling. some visual distortion may occur. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. For buttons with multiple states. The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). the states will be displayed in reverse order. and supports full Cut. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. the level will directly reflect the displayed state. Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. and remove states. Use Ctrl+A to select all button states. When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager window The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu. Copy. Replace states. When the button is turned back off. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. Delete. 13 State Manager window The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page. which includes options to add single or multiple states.11 or higher) 19 .

or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy…". 14). Device .11 or higher) . "Move…". Project . select a button state (thumbnail view). Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu. prior to the first state. or after the last state is disallowed. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over…". and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. "Insert copy…".This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. 14 Transfer Status Window This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status . "Move…". Transfer Status Window The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue. For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu. or "Cancel". containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels. unless all states have been selected.The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer. accessible through the main menu bar: 20 TPDesign4 (v2. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states. A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. or "Cancel". or after the last state executes a move operation. prior to the first state.This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window. FIG. A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu. and the overall status of the transfer. and for transferring TP4 files to the panels. prior to the first state.

In the secondary view. Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 0.secondary view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). 15 Status Bar . Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 15): FIG. and Feedback (FIG. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar. Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position.11 or higher) 21 . FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over.default view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG. it shows the current Cursor position. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). 17): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. The default view. 17 Status Bar . In the default view.connection status TPDesign4 (v2. 16 Status Bar . Size. 16): FIG. Address code and Level code (FIG. and (for the button the mouse is over): Location.The TPDesign4 Work Area Status Bar There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. it shows the current Cursor position.

Like the other windows in TPD4. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button. 22 TPDesign4 (v2. Disable Mute Push FIG. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. the Button Preview window is fully dockable. 18 Button Preview window The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview.The TPDesign4 Work Area Button Preview Window Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Click again to enable the preview. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button. Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons.11 or higher) . for multi-state buttons). but not close the Button Preview window. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. but initially it opens undocked. 18). Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between.

Toggles the page view to one or two pages. Properties Control. click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction. TPDesign4 (v2. To dock/undock a window. click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally.11 or higher) 23 . Working With Dockable Windows All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable. double-click inside the window's title bar. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed). Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window. bottom. Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows To move the windows. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page.Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out .The TPDesign4 Work Area Print Preview Window Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. or along the edges of other docked windows. They automatically snap to the top. The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages. To resize the windows.Prints the current page view Next Page . The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print . as they will appear when printed. right or left side of the application window. the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window Moving. with the image centered on the printed page.Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page . Workspace Navigator. Toggling the Windows Each of the dockable windows (Design View. or along the edge of another dockable window. To stretch the windows.Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC.Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page . State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu. To dock these windows. Zoom In . Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window.Zooms out from the page view Close . drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border.

11 or higher) .The TPDesign4 Work Area 24 TPDesign4 (v2.

Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial touch panel page in the project. You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field.Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File Names. select File > New. Every project created will have at least one page.11 or higher) 25 . Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). To launch the New Project Wizard. from a list of all available fonts on your PC. If you close the wizard after step 1. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.Using the New Project Wizard Using the New Project Wizard Overview The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). and consists of up to three dialogs: 1. You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. When you finish the New Project Wizard. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. 3. 2. click Cancel. you will have created a project with a single page. The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive.. The initial page is listed under the Pages folder. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard .. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process.Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of your new project. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. complete with a start page. and has the edit focus. FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. Click Finish to close the wizard. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. TPDesign4 (v2. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name.) to open the Colors dialog. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. Name: Enter a name for the page. PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field.

to support transport and Teletext keypads. To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options.Step Two dialog 3. To change either of these. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard dialogs The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). New Project Wizard . click Cancel. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. 19 New Project Wizard . New Project Wizard . select File > New. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs: 1. The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension).). This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG.Step 1 dialog To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project).Step 1 dialog The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. FIG. select File > New. CEA etc. use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu) 26 TPDesign4 (v2. New Project Wizard . The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog.Final Step dialog New Project Wizard . Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only). Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300). 19).11 or higher) . If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA.Step One dialog 2. complete with a start page. To launch the New Project Wizard. click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project.

FIG.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . TPDesign4 (v2. Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. 20).11 or higher) 27 . this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply.Step 2 dialog If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name.Step Two dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field.Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. 20 New Project Wizard . File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field.

Final Step dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard .Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard .11 or higher) .Final Step dialog The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page. 21 New Project Wizard ..) to open the Colors dialog. from a list of all available fonts on your PC. Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size.. 28 TPDesign4 (v2. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text.Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. FIG. 21). Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font.

popup pages and buttons (including External Controls. select File > New.TPD4 Project Files (*. TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters. to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. or click the toolbar button. and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons). Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. Inappropriate File Name Characters Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters • Vertical Bar • Question Mark • Asterisk • Less Than Sign • Greater Than Sign • Forward Slash • Back Slash • Double Quotes • Colon • Period | ? * < > / \ " : . including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. Creating a New Project TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard. avoid using inappropriate file name characters. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 29 . buttons including function code information. Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details.TP4) TPD4 Project Files (*. unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel. To launch the New Project Wizard.TP4) Overview TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences. When creating a new Project file. and is ready for you to start adding pages. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog. the project is created with one generic page. Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard. At this point. If you try to save with a longer name.

If you select not to use System-Generated File Names. and Revision). they are simply omitted from the file name. These fields are all optional. the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas. if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG. All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog.Super-Dave Osborne.TP4) System-Generated Project File Names When you are creating a new Project. Purchase Order.11 or higher) . For example. When you utilize System-Generated File Names.TPD4 Project Files (*. you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog). If you leave any of the fields blank. Dealer ID.rev a. Sales Order.My TP Project. the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project.5678-9876. 30 TPDesign4 (v2.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename.Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names) The resulting file name would be: "1234. System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer. 22. FIG. 22 New Project Wizard .

Quick Input Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) For buttons.11 or higher) 31 . The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property . For example. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). any time you select a button in the Design View. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window. For pages and popup pages. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). "Page 2" has current Edit Focus FIG. if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window). then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button. Button has Edit Focus Button does not currently have Edit Focus FIG. Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus. since it is not a valid Address Port number . You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry).TP4) Edit Focus The page. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus.these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog.TPD4 Project Files (*. The Cut. 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus.This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page. For example. popup page. and you perform a "Copy". FIG. edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button. TPDesign4 (v2.

see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page. These actions are independent of any file saves. Text . The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. For instance.This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window).TPD4 Project Files (*.see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons . copied or pasted in TPD4. bitmaps. Copying and Pasting There are several items that can be cut.see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States . has the edit focus. Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. For example. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons. The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity. The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds Cutting. 32 TPDesign4 (v2. Copying/Pasting Pages . Once a panel file is closed. it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone.see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages . Undo/Redo TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level. therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user.Disables the Quick Input option. Disabled . or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo. If no states are selected. This means the last thing selected. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows.11 or higher) . and you perform a "Copy". even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list.TP4) The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected. text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window). Popup Page or Button section on page 205.

you can assign a "video fill" to a page. Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your keyboard.TPD4 Project Files (*. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. 4. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. then individually select each desired button. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. Working With Video Fills If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. 2. When using the Selection Tool. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. FIG. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). The NXP-TPI/4. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details. you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of the Properties Control window) On. In the Properties Control window. You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons. 25). To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. With an item selected in a Design View window. popup page or button. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. Using the Selection Tool To activate the Selection tool. since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog). When using the Selection Tool. as opposed to clicking on the item. To de-select a button.11 or higher) 33 . select Edit > Selection Tool. TPDesign4 (v2. either select another button. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs. You can also select multiple buttons. or left-click on the background of the page or popup page. 25 Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). using any of the following techniques: 1. 3.TP4) If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window.

Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors. Designer.TPD) project files into the workspace. Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate. Panel Strings (Startup. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name. Purchase Order. Revision.TP4) Drag and Drop Support Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties.amx. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. Marquee Speed. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*. Sales Order. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. 34 TPDesign4 (v2. Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported. the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields.TPD4 Project Files (*. Job Comments. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors. Revision Date. File Name. Depending upon the panel selected. Created with Build Number. Dealer ID. Setting Project Properties Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters. Using G4 PanelPreview To preview your panel project. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters.11 or higher) . Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency. Wakeup and Sleep). Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details. Last save date.com. Motion Sensors. Creation Date.

Project Information tab Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG.This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project.TP4) Project Properties dialog . these fields will be blank. Dealer ID . The options in this tab include: Job Name .This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project. These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name.This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project.TPD4 Project Files (*.This read-only field displays the creation date for this project. Designer ID . Sales Order . Created .This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project. FIG. Purchase Order . File Revision . in the New Project Wizard. 26). Modified .This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project).Project Information tab The information in this tab was set up when the project was created. 26 Project Properties dialog .This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.11 or higher) 35 . If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected. and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project. TPDesign4 (v2.This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project.

Once the password has been typed.Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field.Use this text field to enter the password (1 . Confirm . If the file opened in read-only mode. then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog.This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. These protection options are not Windows file attributes.This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project. To simply view the file (as read-only). prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. If the passwords don't match. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed.259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked. the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator. If system-generated file names were not used for the project.11 or higher) . read-only .Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none . files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name.TP4) Revision Date . File Name .This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. this information will be added on the next save. Use System Generated File Names for This Project . and no edits are allowed. 36 TPDesign4 (v2.Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project.this is the default setting (no password protection). click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog). Password . locked . it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field. Protection . prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file.the next time the panel file is selected to open. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. Also.TPD4 Project Files (*. Job Comments .the next time this panel file is opened.

TPDesign4 (v2.Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page . Panel Strings .Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel. the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device. Marquee Speed .Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project. In order to receive strings from a device. In the case of MIO R-4 remotes. 27). This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device. then the master will pass the strings from the device.TPD4 Project Files (*. if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string. FIG. during these three conditions (Startup.TP4) Project Properties dialog .Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel. 27 Project Properties dialog . Click to select the initial startup page for the panel.11 or higher) 37 .Panel Setup Information tab This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed. the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup. from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution). The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency . For example. and indicates it's screen resolution.Panel Setup Information tab Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG. the External Button Option selected is indicated as well. Wakeup and Sleep).

11 or higher) . a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated. a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number. Device Port/Channel Allocation . if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project.select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG. Motion Sensors. 28): FIG. When this option is selected. Project Properties dialog . Specify port allocation .Sensors tab 38 TPDesign4 (v2.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting). 28 Project Properties dialog . Feedback blink rate (10th of second) .Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel). These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation .TP4) Power up popups .select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting). When this option is selected.Sensors tab Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors.If you are using blinking button feedback in your project.select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Inactivity page . Specify channel allocation . Automatically calculate channel allocation .TPD4 Project Files (*. in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5). use this field to specify the blink frequency.The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel.This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page.

11 or higher) 39 . and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below). Project Properties dialog .Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger. FIG.TP4) Light Sensor . The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle). AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving. 29). 29 Project Properties dialog .TPD4 Project Files (*. Motion Sensor .Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor. and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG.IR Emitters and Receivers tab The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers. TPDesign4 (v2.IR Emitters and Receivers tab Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving.Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor.Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels. Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) . Battery Levels .

Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) . it cannot be saved under a new file name. Enter the password in the Password text field.TP4) The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) . If the passwords don't match. Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list (either read-only.TPD4 Project Files (*. Re-type the password in the Confirm field. AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) . The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values).11 or higher) . Locked . Values in the Port column cannot be edited. The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns.Password settings (Project Information tab. 4. 40 TPDesign4 (v2. The default value for each port is zero (not used). The value associated with each port can be modified in-place. locked or none . 30 Project Properties dialog .These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. the Enter Access Password dialog appears.Project Information tab. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog . the file will not be opened at all. in which case you'll need to re-enter the password.the next time the panel file is selected to open. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application. 5.see FIG. Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.TP4) files: Read-only . Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password. As with the original two user IR ports.) 3. Applying Password Protection to Your Project File TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file. FIG. 2. or both. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. To apply password protection to the open Project file: 1. 30). User IR Emitters (MVPs only) . or re-confirm the password. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag. The password is not required to open and view the file. These protection options are not Windows file attributes. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly.the next time this Project file is opened.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels. all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file.

2.11 or higher) 41 .TPD4 Project Files (*. 32 Project Properties dialog . If you select more than one popup page. 31).Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab) Setting Power Up Popup Pages Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on: 1. Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG. 31 Project Properties dialog . The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field.Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. 4. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. FIG. In the Panel Setup Information tab. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed. 2. In the Panel Setup Information tab. 32).TP4) Setting a Power Up Page Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on: 1. repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. 3. FIG. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog. you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. To display multiple popups over the Power up page. Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project. presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.

FIG. click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project (FIG. 42 TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) To remove a popup from the Power up popups list. 33). 33 Project Properties dialog . 2. 5.Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3.11 or higher) . In the Panel Setup Information tab. click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. Click Apply to apply this change.TPD4 Project Files (*. Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time specified on the panel. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project. Setting an Inactive Page Flip Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time: 1.

one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders.TP4) Using the Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support TPDesign4 (v2. Each open Project is represented by a folder. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. Click the + symbol next to the folders.11 or higher) 43 . 34): FIG. in the Workspace Navigator. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). 34 Workspace Navigator . or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain.TPD4 Project Files (*. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time.all tabs Workspace Window . These folders represent Popup Page Groups.

and within Port by Code. Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window .Pages tab (FIG. 35). FIG. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file.11 or higher) .TPD4 Project Files (*. This list is sorted by Port. Address codes.TP4) Workspace Window. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window 44 TPDesign4 (v2. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. Level codes. The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map.

TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types. 36). or both.in this case. popup page and button properties. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. or the Page itself). With an item selected. FIG. and drag it to another field. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. the value is copied to the new location. General buttons. 36 Properties Window To edit any of the listed button properties. Programming and States (FIG. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. When you release the mouse button. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project.TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) Using the Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). select from a drop-down menu. Properties Window . TPDesign4 (v2. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. and the original value is left unchanged. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window.11 or higher) 45 . click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.

11 or higher) . This information is displayed in a table format. popup pages and buttons. This a powerful tool. FIG.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. with a few limitations: Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. Page Flip Options. When this option is enabled. Working With Multiple Projects TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously. TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. 37). Give some thought to which elements of the page.TPD4 Project Files (*. popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG. This information is displayed in a table format. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Channel and Level codes). If you open more than 15 pages. popup page or button you want to retain in the target project. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed).States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button. but can be moved. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page. Properties Control . 0. popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort. similar to the General tab. You can copy/paste pages. a tab is displayed for each open page. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. 37 Paste Controls dialog 46 TPDesign4 (v2. This can obviously be a major time saver. including all of their various attributes across projects. similar to the General tab. and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. Copying/Pasting Across Projects TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs).TP4) Properties Control .

a. Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3. Click Cancel to abort the file open command. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard . Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file. However. or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). for use with G4 panels. this process will not have to be performed again. once the conversion process is applied. prompting you to continue with the migration process. Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. icons and/or sounds. Edit > Paste.TPD4 Project Files (*. via the Open dialog). c. TPI-PRO-DVI). the Project Migration dialog appears. or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). you can specify the target resolution for the project. 2. you will see a Pre-Conversion warning TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) When you copy/paste across projects. Page Flip Options. For example. then save the file. Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project). 2. popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references. popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps. and Paste (use Ctrl+V. Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4) If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open). You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page. Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste the page or popup page into). select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file. Edit > Copy. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. Click Next to proceed. TPI-PRO. b.Warnings & Font Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file. Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved. Channel and Level codes). Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard . the Paste toolbar button. The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs: 1. icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. the bitmaps. Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog). if the selected pages.e. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project. If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons. Click Yes to continue. Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project file. Copying/Pasting Pages. If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i. those elements are copied into the target project along with the page. NXP-TPI4. Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects: 1. project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4. the Copy toolbar button (). the buttons are copied along with the page.11 or higher) 47 . 3. Once the buttons are pasted into the target project. and Copy (use Ctrl+C.Select a Source & Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog.

4. 3. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. the original panel/resolution association. and can be customized as External Controls. For each unmatched font listed. usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border. TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard.Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file. Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you can view/fix the resulting warnings. you can select a substitute font to use instead.e. the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed. R-4 Remote Controller Projects AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard . Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems.Step Two dialog.TP4) message indicating that scaling will occur.Step 1) dialog. 2. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type. The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process. The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file. since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog. Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard . Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . and the target panel/resolution. but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. with a few caveats: 1.TPD4 Project Files (*. As with the panel resolution. 3. like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i.Final Step dialog. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4. If all fonts used in the original file are still available. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels). 48 TPDesign4 (v2. 4. the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled.11 or higher) . are not currently installed on your PC). 5.

TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project.Addresses • Time Display: • Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2. Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General. and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active). the initial page is opened in the Design View.TPD4 Project Files (*.Unsupported Button Types Computer Control. R-4 Setup Codes Levels: R-4 Setup Codes .10. At this point.61.Levels • Mesh: • Mesh: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6 Addresses R-4 Setup Codes . R-4 Remote Devices .11 or higher) 49 . However. Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons. TakeNote. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard.TP4) 6. ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels). All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar. and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers.

This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.e. 50 TPDesign4 (v2.axi): R-4 External Buttons .TPD4 Project Files (*. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects. "<none>". Teletext keypad . the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). i.Default Channel Codes The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API.for use with a standard MIO R-4.TP4) External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. Keypad with Transport Functions . The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. As with the panel resolution. the options include: Default Configuration .Default Channel Codes Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235 The default values are read in when a new project is created. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.11 or higher) . R-4 External Buttons . the External Button Options list is empty.

FIG. 38). external to the panel.Working With The Resource Manager Working With The Resource Manager Overview Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. FIG.Toolbar Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image. 39).11 or higher) 51 . above the tabs (FIG. Slots and Sounds for your project. The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar. 39 Resource Manager dialog . Dynamic Image or Sound files. one or more of the following options will be available: TPDesign4 (v2. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. 38 Resource Manager dialog This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images. TPD4 supports most popular image formats.MP3) to be used in your project. Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (.WAV or . organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project.

lists the files in columns. with small file icons. as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. They work in the typical way. which allows you to add dynamic images to your project. or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. displays the current file name). Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone. By default. However. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). when you paste the multiple images.displays a thumbnail image of each file. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory.11 or higher) . New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files. If you only select one slot. 52 TPDesign4 (v2. you'll only see the first one that you selected. Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab. Details .lists the files in a single column. Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog.Working With The Resource Manager Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed. with a listing of all files targeted for deletion. When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Thumbnails . and support selected multiple files. just from this project. the files are automatically converted to JPGs.lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions. and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs. with small file icons. List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons . For this reason. Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog. Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection. Click OK to rename the file. List . The files are not deleted from the hard drive. containing two fields: Old Name (read-only. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project.

buttons and icons). Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog.Images tab The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s). Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. before they are applied in the project.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Images Resource Manager dialog . it is available for selection to be applied to Pages. button state. 40). Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level). so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. regardless of their context (i.Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages. The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. FIG. etc).11 or higher) 53 . page background. popup pages. Static Image Files Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project. It is important to import all of your images to this tab first.e. Once the image has been imported. TPDesign4 (v2. 40 Resource Manager dialog .

For this reason. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. Open the Images tab. 6. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files. Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 3. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. 54 TPDesign4 (v2. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. 5. Unless you are actually using transparency. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Locate and select the file(s) to import. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. 2. Importing Image Files Into Your Project To import image files into your Project 1. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import.11 or higher) . If this option is selected. Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. 4. JPGs are recommended over PNGs.Working With The Resource Manager Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project. it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab.

Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution.". the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension.11 or higher) 55 ... If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab. Any scaling that occurs is proportional. TPDesign4 (v2. so that the image will not be stretched.Working With The Resource Manager The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024.

Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Dynamic Images Resource Manager dialog . 56 TPDesign4 (v2. buttons and icons). Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. button state. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images. etc). regardless of their context (i. Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed. to replace the generic icon in this tab.11 or higher) . It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s). popup pages. before they are applied in the project. 41 Resource Manager dialog .Dynamic Images tab The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. page background.e.Dynamic Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages. 41): FIG.

Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only).11 or higher) 57 . 41 on page 56). Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab. Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons. Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up. The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project. or FTP. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. This can be any name you choose. Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). external to the panel.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Images Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server.States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on. 5. 42). Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. Path: Enter the Path for the image source. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL. 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog 4. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. FIG. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window . TPDesign4 (v2. Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog: 1. File: Enter the File name for the image source. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). 3. rather than a directory path to an image file. This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6). Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default). try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later. 2.

Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.myspacecdn. refer to the source image properties: a. 43 Example Element Properties dialog As indicated in the drop-down example above. To provide the other information required in this dialog. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. 4. b. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG.jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c.myspacecdn.jpg d. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. it is not required as part of the Host.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Example . 3. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog.11 or higher) . Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1. 2.com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. FIG. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string.ac-images.ac-images. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. 58 TPDesign4 (v2. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.myspacecdn. In a web browser.Adding a Dynamic Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager: 1. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. but also protocol and path information as well. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. 43). go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. we'll use "Photo 1". e.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. At this point.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1.ac-images.

45 Example Dynamic Image TPDesign4 (v2. Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting).11 or higher) 59 .Working With The Resource Manager FIG. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. f. 45). FIG. This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero.

and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images. Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second. or FTP. Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. In TPDesign4. click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG.Working With The Resource Manager When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. In the Dynamic Images tab. 3. Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional). 46).11 or higher). FIG. DynaMo™ Dynamic Images TPDesign4 (v2. See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog . File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images. User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional). 60 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 2.Dynamo Resource option Creating a DynaMo Image 1. The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image.

When working with Dynamo Resource images. only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution. 5. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero. FIG. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button. 48). Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon.. 47). 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog . simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection. In the Dynamic Images tab. The default value is 0. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site. The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image.) button b.. as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default). Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed. leave the User and Password fields blank. c. it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page.Working With The Resource Manager Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well. 4.FIG. via the button's Bitmap properties: a. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only . that matches the output resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image. which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG. select Bitmap to enable the Browse (. and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel. Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. TPDesign4 (v2. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design. the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result. select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button.Dynamo Resource option The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. which means that the resource is only downloaded once. In the States tab of the Properties window.11 or higher) 61 .

the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images. Scale To Fit . and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button. This is the default setting.The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container. 2x . 62 TPDesign4 (v2. popup or page.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states.The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size. If the resulting image is larger than it's container. The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained. popup or page. Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images).This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit. Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource. with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x.11 or higher) . 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog) Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No .

For example. However. what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers.11 or higher) 63 . You can download a free version of FireFox at www.Working With The Resource Manager Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output.org. An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. TPDesign4 (v2. left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. or if necessary. contact manufacturer's technical support. In general. at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input Network Path Information While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG. you may need to consult product documentation. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls.mozilla. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address. many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser. however. manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page. however. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers. at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream. For Dynamo.

just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG.Example 1: Axis Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions.11 or higher) . FIG.cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240 Dynamic Image Settings .Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings .Example 2: Panasonic Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard 64 TPDesign4 (v2. and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated. Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional.Example 1: Axis Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video. 50 Dynamic Image Settings . 49).Example 2: Panasonic FIG. 49 Dynamic Image Settings .

Example 3: Vivotek FIG. 2. 2.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel: 1. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. b.Example 3: Vivotek Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video. In TPD4. set the dynamic image properties to: Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192. 51 Dynamic Image Settings . Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. 52): TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 65 . Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK. 3. In a web browser.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings .30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more) DynaMo Dynamic Image Example . 4.1. refer to the source image properties: a. go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager.168. we'll use "Beach 1").Adding a Streaming Webcam Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager: 1. To provide the other information required in this dialog.

Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. At this point. b. 66 TPDesign4 (v2. e.11 or higher) . and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn.jpg d.net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol.jpg 5.axiscam.axiscam. it is not required as part of the Host.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: a. c. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.Working With The Resource Manager FIG.element properties As indicated above.cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. but also protocol and path information as well. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. 52 Online webcam . Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.axiscam. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.

FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero.11 or higher) 67 . 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog f. The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image. Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager.Working With The Resource Manager The Refresh Rate should be left to zero.

Once the image file is assigned to a Slot. Each project has 2000 slots available. it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab).Slots tab Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot). the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. popup pages and/or buttons as Icons. it can be used as an Icon in your Project. 54). Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Slots TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages. 68 TPDesign4 (v2. 54 Resource Manager dialog . Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager). it can be assigned to a Slot position. TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments. Resource Manager dialog . it is considered to be an Icon. FIG. Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager.Slots tab The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG. Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot. The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project.11 or higher) .

The two file / slot assignments are swapped. only the first five files will be assigned. in the order in which they were selected. When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab. Open the Images. depending on the type of file you are adding. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. This open the Slots tab (FIG. click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab). If you selected multiple files. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment.11 or higher) 69 . If you select just one slot. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. First select the file that you want to duplicate.Working With The Resource Manager If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon. Cancel: If have selected one or more images. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab). The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). or Shift + click to select a range of files). the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments. For example. Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions To assign image files. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. select ten slots before assigning the files. dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project: 1. Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. Click Assign To Slot. Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. Dynamic Images or Sounds tab. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. only the first file selected will be assigned. there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. First select a file / slot assignment. and click Swap. 54 on page 68). and click Duplicate. TPDesign4 (v2. then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file. you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files. Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. 2. you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment. Ctrl + click to select two files. The files will be pasted consecutively. they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty). if you selected ten files to assign to slots. Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. If you select five slots. 4. If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots. click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. In this case. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots. Icons). the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. 3. However. you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel. and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab). Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. By default.

when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps. including all slots to which it was assigned. Popup Pages and Buttons. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages. PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Icons Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project. In TPD4. however. which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details). Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager. icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. JPGs. 70 TPDesign4 (v2. For example. Bitmaps cannot. Icons TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. Text is always drawn last. In TPD4. and icons as the foreground graphic image. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project. For example. that image is removed from the entire project. the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to). and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill. but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to . you could create a button with a Bitmap image. See Z-Order for details. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. on top of the icon. Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first.BMP files). Any supported image file can be made to be an icon.11 or higher) . Bitmaps vs. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps. you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu). For example. simply by assigning it to a slot position. PNGs. and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic. and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager. bitmap or video fill background. and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog).

button state. TPDesign4 (v2. The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files.11 or higher) 71 . page flip.e. Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages.Sounds tab TPD4 supports . 55 Resource Manager dialog . popup pages.Sounds tab The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG. etc). Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s). Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. buttons and icons).MP3 files. regardless of their context (i.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Sounds Resource Manager dialog .WAV and . before they are applied in the project. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project. It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first. 55): FIG.

". If MP3 files are encoded correctly. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. Slots or Sounds).Working With The Resource Manager Supported Sound File Types TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files. This invokes the Open dialog. 56 Choose Directory dialog 5. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. 56). you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. 3. it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab. Dynamic Images. 6. FIG. 2. Open the Sounds tab. This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory: 1. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. 5. 6. Importing Sound Files To Your Project To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. 2. This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. 72 TPDesign4 (v2. Click OK. Click the Export button. Click the Import button. Locate and select the file(s) to import. The program prompts you when the export is finished. 55 on page 71): 1. or Shift + click to select a range of files). 3.11 or higher) . If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab. 4. 4. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images. There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's.. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported. If this option is selected..

rename. Select the sound file that you want to edit. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog.) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files. the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program. delete.. Select the image file that you want to edit. 3. and control is returned to TPD4.11 or higher) 73 . and another for Sound files. undo/redo. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files. and specify the default editors. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e.g. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs. TPDesign4 (v2. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied. etc. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files. 2. 2. When the edit session begins. Editing Image Files 1. Editing Sound Files 1. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. 3. you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog.Working With The Resource Manager Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project.

11 or higher) .Working With The Resource Manager 74 TPDesign4 (v2.

Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. 58 Add Page dialog TPDesign4 (v2. and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings). The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons.see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108. the text color for text applied directly to the page. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project.11 or higher) 75 . all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. You can select the name for the page. Creating a New Page 1. 57. 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page) Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function . the page background color. Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. FIG. The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500.Working With Pages Working With Pages Overview Pages are not only containers for buttons. and "Page 1" is the active page in the project: FIG. If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward. In FIG. Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program. 58). but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project.

To edit any of the listed properties. 3. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. To edit any of the listed properties. Setting General Properties: Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties. In most cases. 5. select from a drop-down menu. you can either set the item manually.) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog. Single-click to select a new color from the list. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description Setting Programming Properties: Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties. 76 TPDesign4 (v2. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Depending on the item selected. With the Page selected. To edit any of the listed properties. the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page.. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. separated into three tabs (General. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Setting Page Properties Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window. Click the browse button (. Programming and States). Single-click to select a new color from the list. or both. or both. or both.. To set Page-level properties. Set the Font Name and Size..Working With Pages 2.) next to Text to open the Colors dialog. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters). Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a. 4. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. Set the Page Background color: a.. under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). Click the browse button (. b. The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. 6. The new page will be appear in the Workspace Navigator in the Pages folder. Click OK to add the new page to the active project. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. Depending on the item selected. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties.11 or higher) . Depending on the item selected. b. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window beneath these fields. The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page).

60 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG. simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog.) button (FIG.. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window) Adding a Fill Color to a Page 1. 2. 60). 4. Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace .Fill Color field 3. TPDesign4 (v2.. and select the color that you want to apply to the page.Working With Pages The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound Renaming a Page To rename any Page in the active project. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. In the States tab of the Properties Window. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (.Pages tab).11 or higher) 77 . FIG. 59).

Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . open the image in any graphics editor program. To check the size of the Pages in your project. 62). TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page.Working With Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project. 2.Bitmap field 3. FIG.) button (FIG. 78 TPDesign4 (v2. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. where you can select the desired bitmap. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project.11 or higher) . Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. To scale an image to fit a target Page. 4. 5. 61). Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 62 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the page (FIG. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. to serve as the background image. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.. 1.Pages tab). check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Window. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window .

. Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace . 2. 65). You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). 63 States tab of the Properties Control window . you can display text directly on a Page in your project. 64 States tab of the Properties Control window . where you can select the desired icon. 64). click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog.. 5.Pages tab). 65 States tab of the Properties Control window . and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters).Working With Pages Adding an Icon to a Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project. Alternatively. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 2. 63). 1. click on the Text field to enable the browse (.. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206).11 or higher) 79 . FIG.) button (FIG. 1. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap.Pages tab). In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the page (FIG. 4.Icon Slot field 3. Adding Text to a Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. you can type directly into the Text field. Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.. TPDesign4 (v2. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. FIG.) button (FIG. FIG. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.

and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page (Yes or No . depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page. 3.Working With Pages Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. 6. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window .FIG. 5. 4. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window .11 or higher) . FIG.. 69)..Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. FIG. 66). Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the page (FIG.. 80 TPDesign4 (v2. any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible.Font field Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).. 67).Word Wrap field If you select No. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text. FIG. 68 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click Word Wrap. 68). FIG. 66 States tab of the Properties Control window . if any exists. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.) button (FIG.) button (FIG.

The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first.Working With Pages Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. therefore. Select (or a create) a Page in your project. Popup Page or Button. Deleting Pages From a Project To delete a page from the active project. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). and select Edit > Delete. at the top most level are Panel Names. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources.States Tab. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window . and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages). All panels must include at least one page. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. In the Properties Control window . Copying/Pasting Pages Copying Pages In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages).Video Fill field 3. 70): FIG. You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. Pasting Pages You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed. select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab).11 or higher) 81 . deleting the last remaining page is not allowed.

you can select the desired level of image compression 7. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. If this option is not selected. 71). this option is enabled. By default. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG.11 or higher) . If this option is not selected. Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. If this option is not selected. The file extension is automatically. Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. 71 Export Page Images dialog 2. Use the browse button (.. 5. By default. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. 6. 9. By default. only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. Select a image file type (JPG. use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name.. As described on the dialog. 4. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. The default setting is 100% (no scaling). 82 TPDesign4 (v2. only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported. PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown. If JPG is selected.) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog. with the button's current display state. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images. the template is set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. By default. this option is enabled. Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the Design View. this option is disabled. FIG. 3. based on the File Format selection. it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. 8.Working With Pages Exporting Pages as Image Files Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files: 1.

This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. TPDesign4 (v2. the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. 72 Print Preview window Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page.Working With Pages Printing Pages Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. as they will appear when printed. FIG. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages. in the Print Preview window (FIG. 72). Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC.11 or higher) 83 .

Working With Pages 84 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages. To position the Popup manually. in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. Once the Popup is displayed on the page.see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29). they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. width or height values. relative to the upper-left corner of the page which is 0. TPDesign4 (v2. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters . 73). FIG. and click to select the desired border style for the popup page. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. and contain only one state. can be assigned a border style and border color. 1. Popup pages. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. top. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. 4. which allows you to quickly create new popup pages.0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. you can click and drag to position it manually. Creating a Popup Page TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool. In the Position fields. unlike pages. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG. 3. Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu. Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details.11 or higher) 85 . enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels. as well as left.Working With Popup Pages Working With Popup Pages Overview Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons. 73 Add Popup Page dialog 2. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties.

Working With Popup Pages Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page. To resize the Popup manually. b. 8. 86 TPDesign4 (v2. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. FIG... Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Click the browse button (. 5.11 or higher) . The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. Note that once you resize the Popup on the page. In the Size fields. Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel. Click the browse button (.. 6. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog. Single-click to select a new color from the list. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). regardless of the page that you display on.. You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup. the Popup will retain the dimensions specified.. enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window. 74 Colors dialog b. Set the Page Background color: a. 74). b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. regardless of the page that you display on. the Popup will always appear in the position specified. Click the browse button (. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Set the Border color: a.. 7.) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the right side of the dialog. Single-click to select a new color from the list.) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog.) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog.

and while holding the left mouse button down. click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool. 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. When using the Selection tool. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. 2. In most cases. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. if desired. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window). When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools. 75). 11. drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape.. 76 Popup Draw Tool The technique is similar to drawing a button. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width. Using the Popup Draw Tool The Popup Draw Tool (FIG. 75 Choose Font dialog b. TPDesign4 (v2. Set the Font Name and Size. To access the Popup Draw toolbar button.Working With Popup Pages 9. a. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool.) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. under the project to which the page was added. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the Workspace Navigator Pages folder. Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group..11 or higher) 87 . Click the browse button (. FIG. FIG. 10. and the result is the same as through standard means: 1. hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square.

you can either set the item manually. In most cases. select from a drop-down menu. 6. The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the popup page in a editable table. 7. hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). With the Popup Page selected. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it.Working With Popup Pages When using the Selection tool.11 or higher) . The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page. Setting Popup Page Properties Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window. 5. Setting General Properties: Popup Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. To set Popup Page-level properties. or both. This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus. The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties. Programming and States). since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. 3. as opposed to clicking on the item. The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the popup page in a editable table. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Depending on the item selected. separated into three tabs (General. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. Use this table to set the popup page's general properties. With an item selected in a Design View window. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos 88 TPDesign4 (v2. click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). 4. Select File > Save to save your changes. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a editable table. Upon the creation of a popup page. you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that are small yellow squares with red interiors. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired. To edit any of the listed button properties.

To edit any of the listed button properties. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Popup Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. or both.11 or higher) 89 . or both. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected.Working With Popup Pages Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the listed button properties.

. 4.) button (FIG. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . 2. all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page. FIG. and select the color that you want to apply to the Popup Page. 90 TPDesign4 (v2. you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. 78 Renaming a Popup Page Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page 1. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 77). as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. Position Assist Tools toolbar Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG. simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page). FIG. Renaming a Popup Page To rename any Popup Page in the active project. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical. 79).. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog.Fill Color field 3.Pages tab).11 or higher) . With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars With only the popup page selected. the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page). 79 States tab of the Properties Control window .Working With Popup Pages Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View. 78).

4. 82 States tab of the Properties Control window . TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. FIG. FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.) button. to serve as the background image.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.Bitmap field 3. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). where you can select the desired bitmap.. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position... If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the Popup Page.11 or higher) 91 . Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. FIG. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. 5. 81 States tab of the Properties Control window . 2. 1. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.) button.Working With Popup Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). 80 States tab of the Properties Control window .Pages tab). Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . 6. where you can select the desired icon. open the image in any graphics editor program. Adding an Icon to a Popup Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel. To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project.Pages tab). 1. 2.Icon Slot field 3.

Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog.. if any exists. FIG.Pages tab). 3.Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text.Font field 92 TPDesign4 (v2. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.11 or higher) . FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). FIG.... 84 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the Popup Page. you can type directly into the Text field. 2. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. Alternatively. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace .. Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 84). and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). 5. 1. 83 States tab of the Properties Control window . If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page. Adding Text to a Popup Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. 85).Working With Popup Pages 4. click on the Text field to enable the browse (.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. 4.) button (FIG.) button (FIG. FIG.) button (FIG.. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. 86). you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project. Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). 86 States tab of the Properties Control window .

FIG.11 or higher) 93 . any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible. In the Properties Control window (General tab). 2. 5. Popup Page or Button. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the Popup Page (FIG. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window .Word Wrap field If you select No. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Creating Popup Page Groups Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page.Working With Popup Pages Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup Page (Yes or No . To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. Click Word Wrap.States Tab. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. 90 States tab of the Properties Control window .Group field TPDesign4 (v2. 89 States tab of the Properties Control window . 87). 2. 6. 87 States tab of the Properties Control window . In the Properties Control window . click Group to activate the text field (FIG. To create a Popup Page group: 1. 89): FIG. 88).Video Fill field 3. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. FIG. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.FIG. 90). FIG.

. 91). or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window. FIG. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar).Working With Popup Pages 3. Deleting Popup Pages From a Project To delete a popup page from the active project. and drag it out of the group. Enter a name for the popup group folder. and select Edit > Delete. 92 States tab of the Properties Control window . 92). The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first. Copying/Pasting Popup Pages Copying Popup Pages You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. To place a popup page in a particular popup group: In the Workspace Window. drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG.11 or higher) .Group field To remove a popup page from a group. 4. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator 5. 94 TPDesign4 (v2. The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator Pages tab (FIG. select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator. select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Pasting Popup Pages You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed. FIG.

To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). TPDesign4 (v2. To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu. FIG. or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button. and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button). Design View context menu. 93 Main Toolbar .Show Popup Page.11 or higher) 95 . Additionally. the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG. 93). you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page.Working With Popup Pages Show/Hide Popup Pages The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu. The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only. Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab).

Working With Popup Pages 96 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. TPDesign4 (v2. Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form. Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. not associated with any specific functionality. and select from the list (see List Box Buttons). Button Draw Tools Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel. 94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool .Working With Buttons Working With Buttons Overview TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list. List Box Draw Tool . Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders. Popup Draw Tool . 94): Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG. there is no On state associated with them.Select to draw buttons (all types. except List Box buttons).Select to draw List Box Buttons. Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases).11 or higher) 97 . and support up to 256 states.Select to draw Popup Pages. and support up to 256 states. TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. Joystick buttons only use the Off state.

and place your cursor within the boundaries of an open Design View. Refer to Properties Window for details. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to. This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. FIG. 6. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels. 98 TPDesign4 (v2. indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. programming. 5. release the left mouse button (FIG. To complete the button draw action. Use the fields and options in the General. If you see this. 95): Button Draw Tool FIG. indicating edit focus. 4. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. and state-specific properties for the selected button. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG. oval or diamond border types. 1. 97 New Button The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to specify general. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) Alternatively. When using the circle. You will see a sizing rectangle as you drag the mouse. Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after. 96). select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu. Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors. 2. 3.e. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. 97). To toggle between Off and On states. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting).11 or higher) . Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). single-click the State button. try using a "smaller" border (i. 96 Drawing a New Button Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100").Working With Buttons Drawing a Button Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. FIG. With an item selected in a Design View window.

Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap. If there is text associated with a button. note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". Furthermore. Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button. and you add a bitmap. when you apply a bitmap to the button. However.e. and does not require a Save operation. when you apply an icon to the button. Note that this name change occurs on the fly. the button name will not change. the button name will not change. via the Name field. the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. TPDesign4 (v2. 98 New Button . the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. However. Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button Preview window (FIG. any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button. then add the text "Welcome". the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i. the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text. TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button.Button Preview window Generated Button Names When new buttons are created. 8. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play.Working With Buttons 7. if the button has no text. 98): FIG. Additionally. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project). For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"). if the button has no text. based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button.11 or higher) 99 . However. "Background"). Note that if you change the text. Select File > Save to save your changes. the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. By default. At any point in the design process. the button text is substituted for the button number. click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s). However. if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon.

If no Border Style was specified (none). select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported Button Types (FIG. 101). then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. select the button in the Design View window. Adding Text to a Button Since button text is a state-specific property. 101 State Properties . Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool). 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property) If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab). For List Box buttons. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property) 3. Specifying a Button Border To specify a border style for a button. 100 TPDesign4 (v2. In the General tab of the Properties Window. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. and type the button text as desired. 99). click on the Text field in the state that you want add the text to.Working With Buttons Specifying the Button Type To specify the button type for any button: 1.Text 3. then all border names are available in the provided list. 2. you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. This enables the browse (. 102). you can type directly into the Text field. and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG. Alternatively. 100): FIG.. Select the desired button type. FIG. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style. Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG. 2. Select or a create a button.. FIG.) button (FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.11 or higher) .

Foreign Language Support for Text For page and button state text properties. Once imported into the panel project. if any exists. Button text is state-specific. so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states. If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device. so use the Text field in the state that you want to change. Hebrew. or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button. the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text. 102 Enter Text dialog You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog).Working With Buttons FIG. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states. In order to display such languages on a page or button state. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text. the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). See the True Type Font Support section on page 6. or only on specific states. These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic. TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts. and Devangari.11 or higher) 101 . The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device. TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. 4.

). and select the color that you want to apply to the Button/State (FIG. Changing the Button Fill Color Since button fill color is a state-specific property.) button (FIG. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. 103 State Properties .. or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button.. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change the fill color on.Text Button Fill Colors are state-specific. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. This enables the browse (. FIG. This enables the browse button (. 104 Colors dialog 4. or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want add the Fill Color to. 104).. Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool). you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window: 1. 2. 2. 102 TPDesign4 (v2.. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states. FIG. 3. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool).11 or higher) . or only on specific states. 103). so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change.Working With Buttons Adding a Fill Color To a Button Since Fill Color is a state-specific property.

Bitmap Button bitmaps are state-specific. where you can select the desired bitmap (FIG. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54).Working With Buttons 3. This enables the browse (. 105). you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.) button (FIG. FIG. FIG. TPDesign4 (v2.. where you can change the fill color. Adding a Bitmap to a Button Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property. click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want add the bitmap to... Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change. or only on specific states. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 2.11 or higher) 103 .. Click the browse button (. 106 Select Resource dialog Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. 3.) to open the Colors dialog. 105 State Properties . 4. so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states. 106).

Working With Buttons 4. or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the button (FIG. 107 State Properties .. where you can select the desired icon (FIG. 107). and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. 3. 108 State Properties . 2.Bitmap Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want add the icon to. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. open the image in any graphics editor program.) button (FIG. FIG. Adding an Icon to a Button With TPD4..Icon Slot Button icons are state-specific. so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change. This enables the browse (. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states. 109). To check the size of the Buttons in your project. 108). you can apply Icons to buttons in your project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property. to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details). To scale an image to fit a target Button. 104 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). 5. you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. FIG. or only on specific states. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool).

110).11 or higher) 105 . FIG. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 4. 5.Working With Buttons FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the icon on the button (FIG. 110 State Properties . you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position.Icon Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. 109 Select Resource dialog If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog.

For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. Unless you are actually using transparency. by making the background color transparent.Working With Buttons Working With Transparent Backgrounds When you are applying an icon. to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. just like you would for any other color in the palette. When using images with transparencies in TPD4. For example. and select transparent as the fill color. if you have a button with an image (FIG.11 or higher) . 106 TPDesign4 (v2. you'll wind up with something like this (FIG. 111 Button With Image and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. but will display without the background (FIG. there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. 112 Button With Image and Icon Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. Generally speaking. However. the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape. 111): FIG. you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background). With a transparent background color. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. 112): FIG. you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. you can effectively change the shape of the image. 113): FIG.

A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (FIG. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. 115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property) For List Box buttons.11 or higher) 107 . use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). 3. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. Since this is a state-oriented setting. opens a DVD Player page. TPDesign4 (v2. A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. Popup Page or Button. and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG. select the button in the Design View window. Adding Text Effects To add a text effect to a button. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. organize and cross-link your control pages. 115): FIG.Working With Buttons Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect. Alternatively. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. Page Flips A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. and page flips allow you to separate. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. FIG. In the Properties Control window . 114). 2. 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property) The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. To apply the video fill across all states. containing only buttons that control the DVD player.States Tab.

. Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog 4. Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button. FIG. FIG. Select a (or create a new) button. click on Page Flip to enable the editable field. 116).11 or higher) . 118). 2.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG. Depending on the type of page flip action selected. In the Properties Control window (General tab). 117). Click the browse button (. popup page or popup group to open. 108 TPDesign4 (v2.. you may need to also specify the target page. 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu) 5. and access a drop-down list of Page Flip Actions (FIG. See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109.Working With Buttons Creating a Page Flip 1. 3.

where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). If dragged with the right mouse button. Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab).This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection) 6. Show Popup . drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page . TPDesign4 (v2. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button. click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog.Working With Buttons FIG. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). Alternatively.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Hide Popup . and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. Previous Page .11 or higher) 109 . Page Flip Actions With a button selected in a Design View window. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab). By default. You can apply multiple page flips to any button.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project.This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched. Select a target page for the page flip. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. Alternatively. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Multiple Standard page flips are allowed. and specify the target page. By default. If dragged with the right mouse button. Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary.

Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched. This allows the user start on page one. Copying Buttons Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar. then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. 110 TPDesign4 (v2. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. This means the last thing selected. even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. If. Copying/Pasting Buttons The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons.11 or higher) . Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button. but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips). if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". this can cause color shifting on the button. Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed. Hide Popup Group . which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Hide Popups on Page . Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched). only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page. Pasting Buttons You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window .Working With Buttons Toggle Popup . flip to page three. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project.This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. Page Flip Forget .This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. bitmaps. and you perform a "Copy".This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. when copying buttons from a page to a popup page.This selection flips to the page specified. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. since it is not a valid Address Port number. flip to page two. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page. Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). Hide All Popups . You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup. For example.Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window.

You can de-select a button by either selecting another button.Working With Buttons Editing Button Properties Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify. you will be notified via a message. If the value is inappropriate for the selected object. Once a property has been modified. either press the Enter key. TPDesign4 (v2. then clicking on the desired button. and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field.11 or higher) 111 . you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. the Prev or Next button. using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click. You can also select multiple buttons. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change. or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. Editing Multiple Selections Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu. and the previous value will be replaced in the box.

To edit any of the properties in the table. or both. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. which have specific functionalities. Programming and State button properties. as opposed to other button types. FIG. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command.Working With Buttons General Buttons General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. and are not associated with a specific functionality. 119 General Properties: Type (General button) Setting Properties: General Buttons Once you have created a General button. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 112 TPDesign4 (v2. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons .11 or higher) .

The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons . States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. Programming and State button properties. 120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button) Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State General button.11 or higher) 113 . FIG.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. or both. select from a drop-down menu. and that support up to 256 states. Depending on the item selected. you can either set the item manually.Working With Buttons Multi-State General Buttons Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. string and text length = 4096 characters. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. To edit any of the properties in the table.

this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. • Range Time Up: • Range Time Down: 114 TPDesign4 (v2. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). For Absolute level control. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. For relative level control. These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters • Level Port: • Level Code: • Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. • Range Low: • Range High: • Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). For example. For Relative level control. Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port. Set the top of the level range (0-255).Working With Buttons Level Control Parameters The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code.11 or higher) . Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). if this value is set to 1000. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button.

States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Bargraph Buttons Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Depending on the item selected. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. or both. 121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Bargraph button. FIG. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the properties in the table.11 or higher) 115 . string and text length = 4096 characters. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons .

Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Programming and State button properties. and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 116 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels.11 or higher) . Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon). 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons . string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. you can either set the item manually. Depending on the item selected. FIG. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. To edit any of the properties in the table.

selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window): FIG.range (range high . The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P . 123 Slider Types Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.range low $H .$ character TPDesign4 (v2.adjusted level value (raw level value . Formatting Codes Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.range high $A .level percentage $V .range low) $$ .Working With Buttons Slider Types There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons.range low) $R .raw level value $L .11 or higher) 117 .

In the Icon X Offset state property. 5. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting).Working With Buttons Creating a Custom Slider Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons. Rather than assign a prepared slider. you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. 2. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders. Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab). you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button. 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog 6. In the case of Bargraph buttons. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons. You adjust a level.) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. 118 TPDesign4 (v2. use up to 255 states to animate the button action. Create a Multi-State Bargraph button.. Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons. FIG. you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). To create a custom slider: 1. 3.. there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window. move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start position" for the bargraph slider. like you would for a normal Bargraph button. 124). or in the State Manager window.11 or higher) . as on Multi-State General buttons. 4. like multi-state General buttons. that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). click the Browse button (. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute.

the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well. Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider. the smoother and more accurate the slider will be. and ending at the top.e. 7. The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). or in the State Manager window. 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states) Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon. 126): FIG.Working With Buttons One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical. 125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states: FIG. you'll want to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence. A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page). Generally. the icon’s new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level). duplicating State 1 (containing the icon). FIG. which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). 8. The range of motion (i. When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog. In the State Manager window. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position. Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. TPDesign4 (v2. 9. Add States to the button (up to 255 total). move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end position" for the bargraph slider. 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State) 10. Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab).11 or higher) 119 .

The results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG. you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects. The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered.) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager). 128 General Properties . open the Button Preview window. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property). an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG.Working With Buttons 11. 120 TPDesign4 (v2. 128). Remember. and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down. 127).11 or higher) . Working With Touch Maps TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.. and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to. Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons. FIG.. 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position) To preview the custom slider in action. Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu.Touch Map Click the browse button (. FIG. See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223.

you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Working With Buttons Joystick Buttons Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation). string and text length = 4096 characters. The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons . you can either set the item manually.11 or higher) 121 . Joystick buttons only use the Off state. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the properties in the table. Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons Once you have created a Joystick button. there is no On state associated with them. or both. FIG. Depending on the item selected. Programming and State button properties. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button) Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases).Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window. select from a drop-down menu. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2.

Programming and State button properties. string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect 122 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons Text Input Buttons Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel. To edit any of the properties in the table. or both. Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons Once you have created a Text Input button. Depending on the item selected. 130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button) Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. you can either set the item manually. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command.11 or higher) . FIG. select from a drop-down menu. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons .

The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators < > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters 0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9. Input Mask Ranges Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. TPDesign4 (v2. The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters { } Start Next Field List End Next Field List Input Mask Operators Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. Digit or space (entry not required. Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only.11 or higher) 123 . Letter (A to Z. Any character or a space (entry required). plus and minus signs allowed). entry required). entry required. Any character or a space (entry optional). The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges [ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator Input Mask Next Field Characters Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed). Letter or digit (entry required). Letter (A to Z. plus and minus signs not allowed). Digit or space (entry not required.Working With Buttons Input Mask Characters The following table lists the available input mask characters. Sets the overflow flag for this field. Letter or digit (entry optional). entry optional).

131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button) Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480. Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. select from a drop-down menu. Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. To edit any of the properties in the table. FIG.11 or higher) . string and text length = 4096 characters. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity 124 TPDesign4 (v2. allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes). Programming and State button properties. Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 800x600 or 1024x768). Depending on the item selected. or both. Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons Once you have created a Computer Control button. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons . you can either set the item manually. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.Working With Buttons Computer Control Buttons Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server.

you can either set the item manually. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap TPDesign4 (v2. Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons Once you have created a TakeNote button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. To edit any of the properties in the table. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. select from a drop-down menu. 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button) TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.Working With Buttons TakeNote Buttons TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. FIG. or both. Programming and State button properties. Depending on the item selected. The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons .11 or higher) 125 .Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. string and text length = 4096 characters.

Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of button you want to create (default = general). this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 5. until the Fill Color setting is changed. 3. font size. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to select a Border Style for the button. 134). this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. On the extreme left side of the toolbar. until the Text Color setting is changed. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. 7. until the settings are changed. the Drawing toolbar becomes activated.Working With Buttons Setting Default New Button Parameters Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) 2. 133) to set the Text Color for the button. 8. These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. Button Draw Tool FIG. until the Border Color setting is changed. 4. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked.11 or higher) . border color and text color. until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed. 126 TPDesign4 (v2. Again. but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion. you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. This way. When the Button Draw tool is selected. button fill color. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new buttons. Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. until the Border Style selection is changed. font. 133 Drawing toolbar The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons. 133) to set the Border Color for the button. To set new button parameters: 1. you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. border family. as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. 6. You can control the button type. Of course. 133). This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. until the Button Type selection is changed. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG.

then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. 136 Position Assist toolbar Vertical Spacing tools Align: Left. and the desired design effect. Right.11 or higher) 127 . Decrease.Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. Horizontal Spacing (Equal. Horizontal Center.Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons. Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position. TPDesign4 (v2. use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page. Position Assist toolbar FIG. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons. 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar: Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools Center tools FIG. To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Order Assist toolbar FIG. Vertical Center. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. select equal spacing. Center Horizontal/Vertical . Vertical Spacing (Equal. 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar: Send To Back Send To Front Shift Up Shift Down FIG. Shift Up/Shift Down . then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page).When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options. 135 Order Assist toolbar Send to Front/Send To Back . select equal spacing.Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. Bottom . To distribute buttons evenly on the page.Working With Buttons Using the Drawing Assist Features The Order Assist. Decrease.Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer). and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button).When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Increase. Top. Remove . Remove) . Increase.

and click one of these commands.Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it.Working With Buttons Size Assist toolbar FIG. For example. and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s). All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected).Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match. For example.35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border . This option is typically for use with the Circle.This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular). 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar: Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG.85:1 Letterbox Video 1.These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden. Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button. the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle.85:1 Anamorphic Video 2. Oval and Diamond border types. 128 TPDesign4 (v2. Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border . try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one). then select the button(s) that you want to resize. Depending on the size of the button. the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s). and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round). and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon. Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based.11 or higher) . Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle. Aspect Ratio .35:1 Letterbox Video 2. Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border. if you create a button with the border "Circle 150". Size To Image . Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1.This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border. As a design concept. 137 Size Assist toolbar Make Same Width/Height/Size . or cropped by the border style). and the selected border type.

you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . bottom. left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first.Working With Buttons Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog To access this dialog.11 or higher) 129 . top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first. 138). All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected.the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first. top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons.select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. Default = 0. Positive values offset the selections to the right. left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. Offset . vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons. Horizontal . FIG. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. negative values offset them to the left. TPDesign4 (v2.The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally.select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting).These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. or along any edge (top. Vertical. 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog The options in this dialog include: Alignment . right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons. left or right). bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first.

FIG. 139 Button Preview window Like the other windows in TPD4. 3. 2. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. In this case. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. Sizing .Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. border. Click on the Push button.the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). Make Same Width . Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. 139). To preview a button: 1. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. negative values subtract). The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 .specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels. Select the button that you want to preview. text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button. negative values subtract). Initially the button is shown in its Off state. but will not have any data linkage.Working With Buttons top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button. Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode. Make Same Height .specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels.Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. Change . Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. height or both. Change . Previewing a Button The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size.These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width.11 or higher) . Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. 130 TPDesign4 (v2. but initially it opens undocked. Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics. Offset . the Button Preview window is fully dockable.The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button. Default = 0.

click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG.Working With Buttons Creating a Date Button A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. but normally you would use the General button type. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. 140). Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. 141 Address Code drop-down menu 5. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. 142).11 or higher) 131 . In the Programming tab of the Properties window. TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 2. The button can be of any type. Create a new button. To create a date button: 1. 3. FIG. 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. 141).

click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. To create a time button: 1. but normally you would use the General button type. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 143).Working With Buttons FIG. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. In the Programming tab of the Properties window. Create a new button. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. dd/mm/yyyy. yyyy-mm-dd. 132 TPDesign4 (v2. Select the desired display format (Weekday. Creating a Time Button A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel.Date Display drop-down menu 6. The button can be of any type. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button.11 or higher) . 141). etc). 3. 142 Address Code . 2. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. FIG.

Working With Buttons FIG. Select the desired display format (24-hour. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. FIG. 145).Time Display drop-down menu 6. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. TPDesign4 (v2. 144 Address Code drop-down menu 5. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG.11 or higher) 133 . 145 Address Code . Standard or Standard AM/PM).

Working With Buttons 134 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons. External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. cursor left. which may be selected like any other button for editing. "<none>". TPDesign4 (v2. cursor right. and MVP-8400 panels. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. cursor up. or cursor select).for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. cursor down. TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons. LED. Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). which may be selected like any other button for editing. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs.for use with a standard MIO R-4. Teletext keypad . NXD-CV7. The global. You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window.Working With External Controls Working With External Controls Overview TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers). i. the External Button Options list is empty.11 or higher) 135 . Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . the options include: Default Configuration .e. The global. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed).for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. As with the panel resolution. Keypad with Transport Functions . Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). MVP-7500.

Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). or cursor select. Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). LED. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. 2. or both. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Once you have selected an external button. cursor right. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. 136 TPDesign4 (v2. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . 3. you can either set the item manually. 1.Working With External Controls When copying a page between panels. cursor up. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. cursor left. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general external control properties. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. cursor down.11 or higher) . To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Setting Global Properties for External LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs). the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general. Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). select from a drop-down menu. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties.

This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button. 2. Once you have selected an external control. The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the selected page in a Design View Window. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Override Global Settings . Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external buttons on the target panel. 1. 3.Working With External Controls Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 137 . To edit any of the properties in the table. If set to Yes. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general button properties. Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with. select from a drop-down menu. Depending on the item selected. 4. you can either set the item manually. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel. click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No).Supported Properties General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . or both. or if its behavior is specific to this page.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. string and text length = 4096 characters.

138 TPDesign4 (v2. The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs .Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.Working With External Controls Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.11 or higher) .

Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed. via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. In unmanaged mode. Further. managed mode presents properties by column. In many ways. and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container. not as individually customizable buttons.11 or higher) 139 . List Data Tables are created in TPD4. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table. You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column.Working With List Box Buttons Working With List Box Buttons Overview TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button. and can be defined statically or dynamically. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). In this case. For example. The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. you can select. individual button properties are not accessible. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). but you cannot add or delete them. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4. List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons.Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons). The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view. the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server. Instead. but do not have any visible properties on the panel. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4. TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons . Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property). TPDesign4 (v2. Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. Think of a table where each cell is a button. The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. and make selections from the list. Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit. since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data. such as a MAX Home Theater server. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table.

or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis. so they can be arranged within the application window. Double-click again to dock the toolbar. List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes List Box Toolbar The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. 146). To move the toolbar. Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row FIG. double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button). In unmanaged mode. click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar. To undock any toolbar. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button.11 or higher) . In managed mode. List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is in managed mode. you can select. borders. add columns and/or rows to the list box button. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons At the time of this release. 146 List Box Toolbar All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable. or modify their Z-Order. 140 TPDesign4 (v2. its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually. and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button. To create subordinate buttons. remove columns and/or rows. In managed mode. Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. you cannot individually select. create. or delete individual subordinate buttons. Changing any properties such as colors. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. To delete subordinate buttons.Working With List Box Buttons The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button.

In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box. 147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 149): FIG. you will not see the container. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel. 149 list box button . 150): TPDesign4 (v2. 148): FIG. 148 list box button with one subordinate button By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Managed Mode Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) By default. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. You can select the container and change the border color to black.11 or higher) 141 . Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse.showing container 3. This way you can see the container (FIG. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. To create a list box button: 1. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 2. 147): List Box Draw Tool FIG. 146 on page 140). If the background color of the page is white. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG.

The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box. FIG. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG.e. Fill Color. 152 List Box button . This function adds a row to the bottom of the list box container (FIG. when the List Box Button is created. the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type. 150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. 151). FIG. border color. When a new row is added. font. Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). Adding Rows 1. The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. 152). each button will have the same state properties (i. fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons.1 Row Added The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container.) as the button above it. 142 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . Border Color etc. 151 List Box button 2.

154 List Box button . If a column is selected. this function is disabled. the preferred row property should be set back to 1. 154). If the preferred row is deleted. 2. If only one column exists. 2. After deletion the container will be resized. TPDesign4 (v2. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area.2 Rows 2. the new column will have the same width as the selected column. A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the list box container. 153 List Box button . Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list box container. and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent. FIG.1 Column Added The width of the last column is used for the new column. the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty". 153).11 or higher) 143 . Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. Deleting Columns 1. FIG. The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20. If a column is deleted. Deleting Rows 1. this function is disabled. If only one row exists. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons Adding Columns 1.

TPD4 takes care of copying.Container Button Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).Container Button Selected 144 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Cutting. When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected. you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. Alternatively. 156): FIG. List Box Buttons . pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. these features are no longer available. All you have to do is select the container.11 or higher) . 156 List Box Button . Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box. 155).Container Button In Managed mode. 155 List Box Buttons . The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. Copying and Pasting a List Box Cutting. as shown below (FIG. FIG. copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG.

since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. Programming and State button properties. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Properties vs. FIG. If you select a List Box Button Column. Column Properties In Managed mode. border type. To edit any of the properties in the table. 158). Instead. Managed mode will not allow you to select or move buttons outside of the container. These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG. The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button) presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole.Container Button Selected 2. List Box button columns do support multiple states.Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons Once you have created a List Box button. fill color etc (FIG. The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width.11 or higher) 145 . properties are split into two perspectives: 1. 157 List Box Button . or both. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected. 157): FIG. When a List Box Container is selected. additional state properties are supported. 158 List Box Button . However. only the Off state is indicated. The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container.

Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. 1. 146 TPDesign4 (v2. 159 List Box Button . click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Buttons .11 or higher) . To edit any of the properties in the table. or both. you can use the General. select from a drop-down menu. you can either set the item manually.Container Button Selected 2. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). Programming. Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity Setting List Box Container Button Properties Once you have created a List Box button. 159: FIG. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button. as shown in FIG.

The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button.Working With List Box Buttons There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details. The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right.Subordinate Buttons List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table.4. When a row or column is added. 160): FIG.1 (FIG. Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. 4 and 1. if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3. List Box Buttons . the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion. The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added. top to bottom. For example.Subordinate Buttons Subordinate Button Placement In managed mode. then this property would be set to 3. 160 List Box Buttons . top to bottom. TPDesign4 (v2. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values.11 or higher) 147 . The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns.

you can either set the item manually. 148 TPDesign4 (v2. Alternatively. You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level.Working With List Box Buttons Subordinate Buttons . 161 List Box Button . TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button. List Box button columns support multiple states. you can use the General. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected. Depending on the item selected. List Box Buttons . Programming. select from a drop-down menu. or both. You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box.11 or higher) . and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. 161): FIG. as shown below (FIG. Click inside the Container to select a column.Columns In Managed mode. To edit any of the properties in the table.Drag and Drop Capability Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box. select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).Middle Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Columns Once you have created a List Box button.

you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column. you can use the General. or both. you can either set the item manually.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Columns . Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) 149 . List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container). Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. Programming. To edit any of the properties in the table. Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat Setting List Box Button Column Properties Once you have created a List Box button.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes. See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column. TPDesign4 (v2. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself).

This logic is present for managed list boxes.Editable Properties Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • List Table Port • List Table Address • List Display • Column Sort Order • List Filter Column • List Selectable • List Table Wrap • List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • Border Style 150 TPDesign4 (v2. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. and individual subordinate buttons can be selected. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is created. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. moved and resized. If the Container is deleted. However. all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. In unmanaged mode. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons . the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. it always defaults to Managed mode. Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed.11 or higher) . but you cannot add or delete them. you can select. In other words. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added. this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes.Unmanaged Mode . When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo.

When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted.11 or higher) 151 . the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection.Editable Properties (Cont. Unmanaged transition is one-way. Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. Columns cannot be removed nor added. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons. By TPDesign4 (v2. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized. This logic is present for managed list boxes. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected.) Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties • Address Port • Address Code • Channel Port • Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties • Feedback • Address Port • Address Code • String Output Port • String Output • Command Port • Command Output State Properties: Off only • Border Color • Fill Color • Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only • Draw Order • Border Name • Border Color • Fill Color • Text Color • Text Effect Color • Overall Opacity • Bitmap Justification • Scale Bitmap To Fit • Icon Justification • Font • Text Justification • Text Effect • Word Wrap • Marquee Direction • Marquee Repeat Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option). Rows cannot be removed nor added. In other words. The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature.Unmanaged Mode .Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons . the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well.

163): FIG.11 or higher) . List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). 162): List Box Draw Tool FIG. 164): FIG. Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) By default. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. 163 list box button with one subordinate button 3. 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar. this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed.Working With List Box Buttons removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows 4. 152 TPDesign4 (v2. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. To create a list box button: 1. 2.

In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns. If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i. the remainder is dropped. This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. 166). FIG. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode: Once set. 1). Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode. 165 List Box Buttons . the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG. The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels. After resizing the column. If the last column is selected. the other rows.Working With List Box Buttons 5.Resizing When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles. 165). resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup. 6. the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change.Resizing If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows. List Box Buttons . When two or more columns are selected. plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes".11 or higher) 153 . 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. If Preferred Row is 0. Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners. up to the number of rows present in the list box. the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the TPDesign4 (v2. only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG. FIG. When a List Box Column is selected.e. resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs.

the Drawing toolbar (FIG. Sort Column (1-20) . 167 Drawing toolbar When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool.Move list up one entry.Move list to end of page.Move list down one entry. Page Up .Move list up one page. Down .Z-Order In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel. Press again for an ascending re-sort. If you select a column.Navigation Buttons General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button.e. the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order.Move list to top of page. a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons . the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column. Page Down .). When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected). Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode. fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons. When resizing the width of a column. border color. send-to-back. On first press. Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons When the List Box Draw Tool is selected.Sort the specified column. 167) can be used to set the border. End . List Box Buttons .11 or higher) . Up . the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar. Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property). For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added. the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box. you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box. 154 TPDesign4 (v2. fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons. font. Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. when the List Box Button is created. Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode. For unmanaged list boxes. then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar). etc. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type. the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order. List Box Buttons . When resized in this way. or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front.Move list down one page. at the time that the button is created.it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). pasted. Home . deleted.Working With List Box Buttons number columns selected. the minimum allowed is 4 pixels. These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons. A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i.

2. The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3". five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):. The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". 7. 3. 4. Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down". FIG. the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box. If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project. one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down: 6. The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down. etc.assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project). The smaller cyan buttons. they will be listed as "List Box 1". 5. Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box. Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the desired function. 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1.11 or higher) 155 .Programming Tab . 168 illustrates a List Box (in white). All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control .Working With List Box Buttons FIG. "List Box 2". See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details. TPDesign4 (v2. For example.

the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list.Level Code set to Scroll (option 2) Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white. The size of the list is not represented. 169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. Again.Level Code set to Scroll (option1) The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. 170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar .11 or higher) .Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down. These bargraphs depict position only. The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down. 156 TPDesign4 (v2. 169): FIG. 170): FIG. Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll".

171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position. To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow TPDesign4 (v2. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar .Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar The yellow button in FIG. bg2 and bg3: FIG. 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Components FIG. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size.Scroll Bar Components Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. It does not have any navigation capability: FIG.11 or higher) 157 . 172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1.

You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware. This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table. the button will sort the list box based on this column selection.Move up one page Page Down . Down. and it's associated dialogs: 158 TPDesign4 (v2..Move down one page Home . a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button. List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons. such as the MAX AVP). the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button.e. List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG. TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up.Move down one entry Page Up . based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i.Channel Code Values Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none . The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns. However.. It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar.no navigation command will be associated with this button.Working With List Box Buttons Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box.Move to Top of page End . Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data. supplied by the List Data Table)." automatically. 173).. edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons. Navigation Buttons .11 or higher) . List Data Table TPD4 supports the ability to create.Move up one entry Down . It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider. Button bg3 is not really needed.Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) . TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type. Up . Once created. Once applied to a Navigation Button. It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #". a panel without a touch overlay.Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20).

A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data. Static List Box Data A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel.The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table. Conversely. 173 Edit List Table dialog List Data Table Properties The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name .Select either a static or a dynamic table type. Table Address Port .The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data. the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled. the device cannot display current state information provided by the master.11 or higher) 159 . no raw data will be entered by the user. Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data. Table Address Code . Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons. Therefore. Dynamic List Box Data Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master.The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table. the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. Opposed to static data. Table Type .

3. Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table. Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. as well as a List Data Table. Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. which populates the List Box Button dynamically. See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. however. which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. 174 Create New Table dialog Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table. 173 on page 159). so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button: 1. Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table. FIG.e. 4.. See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. 174). If you haven't already done so. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171. with data defined in NetLinx Code. i.11 or higher) . if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table.Working With List Box Buttons Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. Dynamic List Box Data. 2. Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. create a new List Box button. with enough rows and columns to accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data. Creating a Static List Data Table To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button. where you will specify basic properties for the new table. Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. date. This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: 160 TPDesign4 (v2. 175). time or temperature.

to assign a specific type to each column. 176).The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified.11 or higher) 161 .The column will display icons from a table of icon references. Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog. This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG. Icon . resize the table. This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation. The following are the available column types to select from: Text . use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from the active table. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order. each one is added to the Tables list. Add Column . and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row . 5.Click to add a row to the table. At this point.Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column.This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row. As you create more new tables.Click to add a column to the table. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table.The column will contain a variable length text value.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. Delete Row . Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. Port/Channel Code . 6.The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references. Page Flip . Bitmap . 175 Column Types dialog Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. You can select any table from the list to edit its properties.

Click to expand each column by equal amounts. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order.Click to shrink each column by equal amounts. 162 TPDesign4 (v2.Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog. Delete Column . Icon .Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps. Fit Table . Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Page Flip . Rename Column . Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. If the column is of the type "Page Flip". 7. 176 Add List Table Column This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width. Port/Addr . Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination.Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table. Power Assign . Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width. Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog. channel/variable text. Shrink Columns .Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected. Bitmap . If the type is of the type "Channel Code".Click to delete the column that currently has focus. and code parameters to one or more selected buttons.11 or higher) . 8. If the column is of the type "Bitmap". Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions. to assign a specific type to each column.Assign to columns that will be used to display icons.Assign to columns that will be used to display text. then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell: If column is of the type "Text". you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project. then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed. This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog. Channel Code .Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window.Working With List Box Buttons FIG.Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information. The column type options include: Text (default) . the user will be able to enter data. Expand Columns .This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column.

This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. In the Design View window. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. FIG. 2. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (.Working With List Box Buttons If the column is of the type "Icon". as well as a Static List Data Table.) button.see Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 160. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. 1. Once a table is selected. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window.11 or higher) 163 . select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. Select the table that you want to attach to the selected List Box Button. you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project.. the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. TPDesign4 (v2. Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button . To move rows. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 177).. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. 4. select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. 9.

1 . address 1.<uniflag>.Best of. Best of. 0 .<data2>.11 or higher) . Click the Delete command button. Creating a Dynamic List Data Table Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode. Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>. Click OK to proceed. List box commands contain comma-delimited fields.<list address>. Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View Data List Commands Data List Commands ^LDN Creates a new data list.Working With List Box Buttons Deleting a List Data Table To delete a List Data Table from your project: 1. 4. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. but you can use commas within the fields. Meatloaf.No unicode.4.my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5. 2.<column count>. and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row.Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. column data information. 1. in the Tables list.<list name>'" Variables: • list port = port where data resides • list address = address where data resides • column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) • list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. 3. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list. Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG.<primary data>. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. 164 TPDesign4 (v2. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted. Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>. 2. 173 on page 159). Primary data is required.. • data2 = variable. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.1.. The primary data is set as Entry5. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically. Select the table that you want to delete. "'^LDA-1. Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed.. "'^LDN-5.Entry5. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list.Meatloaf.

<primary data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode.<uniflag>. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 0 . ^LDD Deletes the data list. the first column is Text.1.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column.Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Column is the index of the first type to set. 4 . Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number • type = subsequent columns.Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1. "'^LDR-1.0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1.<type>.<type>.. ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list. 1 .<column>. additional types sent are set in order.11 or higher) 165 .No unicode. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness. "'^LDT-1..) ^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>.Channel.0.0. "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1.. TPDesign4 (v2. Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. 0 . Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont.Text. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list. the second and third columns are also Text.0. "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1. The column type starts at column 1. 3 .

"'^LDL-1.Entry5.No unicode.1.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. Within double quotes.Music'" The field located in column 1. as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes. 166 TPDesign4 (v2. When a backslash is parsed. Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field. the backslash (\) is used as an escape character. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.<uniflag>. Data List Command Rules The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands. the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded.<column>.11 or higher) . then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. 0 . numbering starts at 1 • uniflag = indicates unicode. 1 .) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field.0. in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music.) ^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>.<primary data>.<new cell data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number. • new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped).

2. it results in a reverse sort.<list port>.11 or higher) 167 .Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. When used on a sorted list. Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask. ^LVL Data list.1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2. tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. When used on a reverse sorted list. so that the 3 bit positions may be combined.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View Command Structure List View ^LVO Filter sort. set the data list displayed.<sort>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • sort: Bit 0x0001 . TPDesign4 (v2. address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list. it results in a forward sorted list.Reverse Bit 0x0040 . "'^LVL-5. the reverse bit should not be used alone.Sort Bit 0x0002 . Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>.<list address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • list port = port where list resides • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>. Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list. "'^LVO-1. In most cases.

Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>.<column>. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>. "'^LVM-2.. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>.1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first.numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. ^LVS Sort.3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2.. numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<index>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • index = the row number in sequential order.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont. Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>. 168 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .<column>. sets the table column each view column displays.) ^LVP Set position.. "'^LVC-3. ^LVM Move. display a new position..<column>.-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2. then column 2 and then column 1. Update must be called for changes to take effect.. display a new position.<offset>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • offset = + / .5. then column 2 and then column 1.1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3..2. sets column order for sorting.5. "'^LVS-3. "'^LVP-5.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.<column>. ^LVC Column display order.

"'^LDT-1. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands.0.1.my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins.5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3.0. "10. Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.No unicode.<uniflag>.0.) ^LVF Filter.Uses unicode • column = the starting column number. this will update the view to any sort. Kissing the Lipless.3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. • The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1.0. Note: This must be called after changes to list data.0. numbering starts at 1 • search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do.2.5.<column>. "'^LDN-1. "'LVF-1. • Filter is case sensitive. address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1"'" TPDesign4 (v2. "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1.11 or higher) 169 .<search data>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • uniflag = indicates unicode. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>. 0 . 1 . or list data changes. "'^LDA-1. DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. Dynamic List box Table Example The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. filter.01. sets what column to use and what string to compare. Update must be called for changes to take effect. ^LVU Update.Smith'" • Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed.1.

"'^LDA-1.6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1.07.3] 170 TPDesign4 (v2.2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. "'^LVO-2.0. "'^LDA-1.0.2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. "10.1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Those to Come.7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. "10. "10. SEND_COMMAND Keypad.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Saint Simon.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.02.03. "Mine's Not a High Horse". Chutes Too Narrow. Young Pilgrim. Chutes Too Narrow. "'^LVC-2. "10.09. "'^LDA-1.10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.06.0. "'^LDA-1.The Shins.The Shins.05.0.The Shins. Gone for Good. "10.9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.The Shins.08.0.04. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.0. The 1 indicates forward sort. So Says I.7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "10. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins. "'^LVS-2. Chutes Too Narrow.The Shins. Fighting in a Sack. "10.4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad.3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0.1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. The 1 indicates forward sort.11 or higher) .5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1.The Shins.Working With List Box Buttons SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. "'^LVS-2. Chutes Too Narrow. "10. Pink Bullets. SEND_COMMAND Keypad.8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.10.0.The Shins. "'^LDA-1. "'^LVO-2. Chutes Too Narrow. Chutes Too Narrow.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Turn a Square. "'^LDA-1.6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2.The Shins. "10.

']'" Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a List Box Button. In the Design View window.10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2. In the General tab of the Properties Window.) button. Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG.4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.CHANNEL).[Track '. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button.itoa(BUTTON.5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. 1. "'^TXT-1.9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands)..0..INPUT. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. FIG.Working With List Box Buttons BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.11 or higher) 171 . 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button.6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields.7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. 178). 2. 4. TPDesign4 (v2.

172 TPDesign4 (v2. via the List Table Power Assign dialog. via Panel > Edit List Tables.Working With List Box Buttons Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table. This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog 4. 164). showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table. or click the toolbar button). 173 on page 159). Click the Port/Addr command button. Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table Address fields at the bottom of this dialog. Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog. Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list).11 or higher) . FIG. 5. 2. 3. Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG.

11 or higher) 173 .Working With List Box Buttons TPDesign4 (v2.

11 or higher) .Working With List Box Buttons 174 TPDesign4 (v2.

or the Page itself). and drag it to another field. and the button type is general. FIG. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. With an item selected. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 175 . the selected button is named "pause". and the original value is left unchanged. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. 180). When you release the mouse button.Working With Properties Working With Properties Overview The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. Programming and States (FIG. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. 180 Properties Window Drag and Drop Support Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. popup page and button properties. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. the value is copied to the new location.

This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. 176 TPDesign4 (v2. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. 181). You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. but not on multiple states for a single button. 182 Prev and Next buttons These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. and you select more than one button to act on. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus.Working With Properties Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. FIG. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. provided that the change can be applied to them all. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). FIG. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. When you have multiple buttons selected. If the Apply To All button is not depressed. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons.11 or higher) . located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. 181 Apply To All button Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. 182). Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons.

With the Selection tool (FIG. 4.Working With Properties Working With The Property Painter The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button. Page or Popup Page. FIG. 183 Grab Properties Tool 2. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu). Page or Popup Page: 1. See Saving a Properties Set. 184). or click the toolbar button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG. In the Property Painter dialog. 185). and paint (copy) them onto another Button. The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. select another Button. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the Button. Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu. 184 Property Painter dialog 3. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. 183). FIG. 185 Selection Tool TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 5.11 or higher) 177 . Page or Popup Page in the Design View. Page or Popup Page that is clicked on. the Design View context menu. click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button. Page or Popup Page that you want to grab.

186 Property Painter dialog Saving a Properties Set Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later. 178 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s) (FIG.Working With Properties Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons. 6. 186). FIG.

This option is not available for buttons on a popup page. Column Display Order Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table. 187 Column Display Order For example. default = No). and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from. and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons. from left to right. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. TPDesign4 (v2. default = No).11 or higher) 179 . using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns. FIG. Animate Time Up The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. Auto-Repeat Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit). Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. Animate Time Down The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). Border Style To change the Border Style for the selected button. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. click Border Style. Color Depth Select the color depth to be applied to the button.Working With Properties General Properties All General properties (including Page. These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window: Above Popups This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No. Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC.

11 or higher) . This property is available for Popup Pages only. Click the browse (. The default is single line.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No). Description Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button. Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty. Column Sort Order Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. and finally column 5. if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1. To add a group.. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Click the browse (. simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder. Click the browse (. Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.Working With Properties Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. when a List Data Table is assigned. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. when a List Data Table is assigned. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). Group Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group. Display Type Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). One or more columns can be specified. Cursor Name Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor. with a space between each number) "3 1 5". 180 TPDesign4 (v2. Compression Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No. where you can type the description. where you can type the description. the value would be (without quotes... and a List Table Address and Port is assigned.. For example. then column 1.) button to open the Enter Text dialog. To place a popup page in a particular popup group. Cursor Color Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down). Disabled Indicates how the selected button will be rendered.) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only.. default = No).. the value would be "1". type any value in the Group field. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned.

to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). suggest a proper format with fixed characters. TPDesign4 (v2. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Input Mask This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. \A is displayed as just A. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects). Hide Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects). or Hide Effect Y Pos.11 or higher) 181 . and/or fill the field from the right or the left. the Hide Effect X Pos. You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button.Working With Properties Height Size values. the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field. depending on the page design and graphics. the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No).9999). you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . This property is available for Popup Pages only. In some cases. Hidden Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. Hide Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect. you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down). Hide Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. enter any character other than those shown in the topics above. in pixels. An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. characters). these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button. To define a literal. to change or force character case. For example. measured in 1/10th-second increments. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected.9999). Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). including spaces and symbols. to set the input as required or optional.

A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width. The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button.Working With Properties Left Position values. This property is available for List Box buttons only. 182 TPDesign4 (v2. List Display A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10. justified vertically. The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. List Column An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished.11 or higher) . You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. and only when a List Table Port is assigned. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. in pixels. to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. List Column Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. one subordinate button is created automatically. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. At creation. List Table Port An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. and the minimum is 1. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable).

If set to "no" (default setting). It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. List Table Wrap This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data. List Managed This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.Working With Properties List Table Address An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. In this way. This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned. List Filter Column This property sets the column order for filtering data. the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. When set to "yes". This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. When set to no. to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. If the user presses the scroll bar down button. TPDesign4 (v2. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic). You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog).11 or higher) 183 . beginning and end limits are present for the list box. A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list. the next page of data will show up in the list box. List Offset Enabled A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on). The same goes for scrolling up. therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data. the list becomes cyclical.

184 TPDesign4 (v2. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. List Preferred Row Height An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box. Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. At creation. The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. All other rows are specified the same height. justified horizontally. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box buttons only.e. First. and the minimum is 1. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height. Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. List Row Height An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i. Second. List Row An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. List Selectable This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0). the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. one subordinate button is created automatically. This property is read-only and cannot be edited.11 or higher) . This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. Marquee state properties are column-based properties. This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control.Working With Properties List Preferred Row An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0". This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. List Row Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons.

Default = 5900. Max Text Length Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button. S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details. Remote Port The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. Click the browse button (. password 3. When new buttons are created. Remote Host The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type. where you can type the new name. default = No).. You can set up to four passwords per panel. separated by a colon (i. etc). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. password 1. and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page. You must use a unique name for each button. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog.. Button/Popup 2.e. See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details. Password Character Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel. password 2. TPDesign4 (v2. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. "Button 2 : multi-state general". or password 4). Password The password supplied by the designer.Working With Properties Lock Button Name This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No.. "Button 1 : general". Modal This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. page and popup page. Button/Popup 3 etc.11 or higher) 185 . This property is available for Popup Pages only. Name To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1. Password Protection This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). Page Flip Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s). use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none.

Show Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels.Working With Properties Reset Pos. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. If the count is decreased. click inside the text field and enter the desired number. default = No). This property is available for Popup Pages only. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. Click the browse button (.9999). On Show If this option is turned on.. new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. Slider Color Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). Show Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. states are removed from the end of the set. the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect. measured in 1/10th-second increments. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. either the Show Effect X Pos. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect.9999). or Show Effect Y Pos. depending on the page design and graphics. the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. Show Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will. scaling is disabled. This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool. This property is available for Popup Pages only. To change the state count for the selected button. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. By default. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). Slider Name Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types.) to open the Colors dialog.11 or higher) . you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. State Count This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected. If the state count is increased. This property is available for Bargraph buttons only. In some cases.. to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown). Scale To Fit Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No. 186 TPDesign4 (v2. If you have selected a left or right slide effect. you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 .

For example.11 or higher) 187 . only the border will respond to a press. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. in 1/10th second increments. Touch Style This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s).. in pixels. Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button. Top Left/Top . Active Touch will not work. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. To make a button totally transparent. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed. Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. via the Select Resource dialog. Timeout This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout. the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action). and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map. if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon.) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. default = No). in terms of the shape and border style used. Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. Similarly.Position values. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). TakeNote Port Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). This property is available for Popup Pages only. only the icon would respond to a press. For example. Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon. Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. Touch Map Click the browse button (. TPDesign4 (v2. TakeNote Host Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button. by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular). If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency). If there is no other button underneath the pass through button.Working With Properties TakeNote Enabled Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No..

Width Size value. Horizontal. For non-multi state Bargraph buttons. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. the options are Vertical or Horizontal. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu. the options are Vertical. To change a selected button's type.11 or higher) . This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. or Touch Map. containing a list of all available button types. Value Direction Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button.Working With Properties Type The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created. For Multi State Bargraph buttons. 188 TPDesign4 (v2.

Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control. TPDesign4 (v2. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. none .. Command Port Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied. only while the button is being pressed. or none). blink .the button will change states. The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique. Address Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated. momentary. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. Command Output Specify the command string sent to the master on button push.Working With Properties Programing Properties All Programming properties (including Page.the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary . Click the browse button (. Feedback Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel. then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu. If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port.the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on . Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). blink. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window: Address Code Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port. to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions. inverted channel.the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel .11 or higher) 189 . 1. and only if a Level Code has been assigned.the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel .) to open the Enter Text dialog.the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release Level Aux This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port.. Channel Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique. 2. always on. Channel Code Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality.

These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined. Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. if this value is set to 1000. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button.11 or higher) . 2 or auto-assign). Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels). Level Port Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). Level Function This option is only available for Bargraph. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. 190 TPDesign4 (v2. Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). to allow for glide-point style controls. For example. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released.Working With Properties Level Code Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none. Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. Level Control Repeat Time This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. Relative or None). Range Aux Inverted If set to Yes. When set to Drag. For Relative level control. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. For relative level control. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Level Control Type These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch. Level Control Value For Absolute level control. 1.

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment
This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit
This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color
If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru
Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option
Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

4. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. When the first instance of the criteria is found. the Select All button is disabled. name. Open the Find dialog (FIG. in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. In the Search Scope area. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. For example. click in the checkbox next to the General heading.Working With Properties Searching For Button Properties Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog. to select all State-oriented button properties. which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page. border style. 188 Find dialog 2. 188). TPDesign4 (v2. You can include any General or State button property as search criteria. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. select either Entire Panel or Current Page. or across the entire Project. To select all General button properties. the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the buttons that satisfy the search criteria. based on the specified criteria and scope.11 or higher) 197 . If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel. or any combination of search criteria. you can perform a search based on button type. and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. FIG. click in the checkbox next to the States heading. To search for button properties: 1. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. In the Search Criteria table. use the Find Next button to search the current page only. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Select Find Next to continue the search. select the button properties to use as the search criteria. 3. Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. and state count (among many others).

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties
Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States
Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window
The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu
Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button
There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).
When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button
You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button
States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button
Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move…" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button
Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)
Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States
Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes
Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

11 or higher) . as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button). press the F7 key to toggle the function codes. 197 Function Code Map 208 TPDesign4 (v2. they will also be included in printed output. Function Code Map Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG. Function Codes . The maximum number of level codes per port is 600. The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100.Working With Function Codes Show/Hide Function Codes You can choose to display function codes. FIG. If Display Function Codes is enabled. 197).Limitations The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. Alternatively. The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000.

ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type. and within Port by Code. Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders. that code will be ignored. Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map. Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type. Address and Level codes via these folders. Level codes. This list is sorted by Port. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light. Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. TPDesign4 (v2. These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. Therefore. battery.e. within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i. they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. and/or cradle). Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. Setting the Address. and fix any problems that are found.11 or higher) 209 . A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item. Address codes. Channel Codes. Address Codes.Working With Function Codes The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel. Level Codes). You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another. motion. 0.Setup Port Setting the Address. For example.

To accomplish this. Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. select Channel. Under Function Code Type. one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible.Working With Function Codes Using Power Assign One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel. left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code. 198). 3. and does not affect pages or popup pages. Under Function Code Type. In some cases. FIG. select Channel. and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned. they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. Under Function Code Action. Finally. all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog. select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. select Assign. Power Assign works only at the button level. Address or Level. then: 1. The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button. Use Power Assign to streamline this process. but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning. then by holding down the CTRL key. select Clear.11 or higher) . by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options. 198 Power Assign dialog One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected. 2. this may be what you want to have happen. Assign Codes Next assign new function codes: 1. address and level function codes for any given button. Click Assign. 2. 3. Under Function Code Action. Address or Level. Clear Channels First One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. and other properties that depend on button type. To use take full advantage of Power Assign. If you don't clear the codes first. you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved: 210 TPDesign4 (v2. or on a group of selected buttons. Click Assign.

address. The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads. you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. In these cases. just like the standard Auto Assign. as in a numeric keypad. Then supply the port and channel code values. Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) This is used when the channel codes have to be in order. Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. check the Wrap Within Port ID option. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so. which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. Next.Working With Function Codes Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel. Next. and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port. since the order is important. and click Assign. the assign operation begins at the first available channel. One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use. and make a note of the start channel. the feedback part of the System Call won't work. if you make a mistake. However. uncheck this option. things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value. and TPD4 will find the next available free channels. While initially somewhat confusing. If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option. click Address under Function Code Type. with no breaks between them. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough. if the order is important to you. one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox. click Channel under Function Code Type. and click Assign again. Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign) Since touch panels support more than one port. You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. If you don't care what channels are assigned. If the channels are split across ports. since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes. make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select. Since the selection is retained after any operation. In either of these cases. or Level) code. an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. 3. skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. First. 2. This will visually display the channel. One can also simply undo the action if desired. which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. Address. use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options.11 or higher) 211 . Here's the setup you would use: 1. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. TPDesign4 (v2. open the Power Assign dialog.

11 or higher) .Working With Function Codes 212 TPDesign4 (v2.

There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters. The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette: 1. RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue. and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. click on the Border Color. a Microsoft® formatted palette file. then click More Colors. Blue and Green) values. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. In most cases. TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC® formatted palette file.Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette. popup pages. 199 Colors dialog .11 or higher) 213 . The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. and text (pages. Additionally. FIG. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. popup page or button. plus Hue. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. Palettes are saved as part of the panel file. Brightness and Opacity. TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes.RGB Color TPDesign4 (v2. transparencies (popup pages and buttons). Saturation. which allows you to specify RGB (Red. Saturation. Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette. Click to select an existing page. Brightness and Opacity) values numerically. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. popup pages and buttons). or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. or by dragging the cursor around the palette. and buttons). The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages. 199).

Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired).Palette Index 3. The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG. FIG. 200 Colors dialog . These Base 88 colors are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3.Color Name 214 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Colors and Palettes 2. FIG. 201 Colors dialog . Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme. 200).11 or higher) . 201). and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG.

Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder).PAL files. and named palette entries. For example. without having to edit the buttons directly. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application.one color scheme for each season. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . so once imported. the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. Working With Palettes TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. Creating New Palette Entries 1. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Working With Multiple Color Palettes TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes. 202 Edit Palettes dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *.Working With Colors and Palettes Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency. this can cause color shifting on the button. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes. which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette.PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects. 202). FIG. custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package. Custom Palettes can be saved as *.11 or higher) 215 .

use the cursor in the Color Value chart. 2. Creating Custom Palettes 1. the new palette is titled Unnamed. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. By default. Use the cursor in the Color Value chart. To add palette entries (colors) to this palette. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). 203 Rename dialog 4. select an existing color. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. To edit an existing palette entry. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. This is optional. 3. Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry. 2.5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. 202 on page 215). opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. 3. 3. 4. This is optional. Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to.11 or higher) . 216 TPDesign4 (v2. By default. 4. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list. as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog. 2. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Red/Blue/Green. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. Select a palette entry: To add a new palette entry to the palette. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies. FIG. 203 on page 216). in the palette selection drop-down list. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. select a slot with no color assignment. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. By default. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. 202 on page 215). 6. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. 6.Working With Colors and Palettes By default. in the upper-left corner of this dialog. Repeat steps 3 . but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. 5. Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK. 5. Renaming Palettes 1. Red/Blue/Green. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list.

If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette. If you select a slot that already has a palette entry. 202 on page 215). as a *. 6. Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option: 1. Click the Import button to access the Open dialog.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog. 202 on page 215). 4. and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list.PAL file.PAL file. Copying Palettes Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes: 1.Working With Colors and Palettes 5. 3. 202 on page 215). Alternatively. 3. you must select the Set Active button at the top of the dialog.11 or higher) 217 . 2. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. the copied color will overwrite the original. 202 on page 215). 4. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries. Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog. Click the Copy button. Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. 4. Importing Palette Files You can import palette (*. Exporting Palette Files You can export palette (*. Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. Copying Palette Entries Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors): 1. 2. TPDesign4 (v2. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog).PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog: 1. 5. Note that the new name overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list). 202 on page 215). Click the Copy Entry button. select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. in the upper-left corner of the dialog. 2. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). Changing the Active Palette To select a different palette to use. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry. Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *. 2. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified directory. 3.

the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). 218 TPDesign4 (v2. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements. the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder. without having to edit the buttons directly. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design .one color scheme for each design. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4. While it is not an enforced requirement.TPT). the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. For example.Working With Colors and Palettes Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. and saved as part of the TPD4 project. Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft® Paint.11 or higher) . However. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder.

Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. popup page or button. you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options If you are working with an existing page with buttons. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page. and not a button on the page.States Tab. The NXP-TPI/4. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. FIG. In the Properties Control window . Streaming Video Fills If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG. NXD/NXT-1500VG. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window). Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field. then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. TPDesign4 (v2. and NXD/NXT-1700VG only). Popup Page or Button. 2. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. 3. Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3). The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs.Working With Video Fills Working With Video Fills Overview If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel.11 or higher) 219 . be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs. Select (or a create) a Page in your project. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. 204).

If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. 3. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page. be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page. In the Properties Control window . Since this is a state-oriented setting. 2. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. and not a button on the Popup Page.11 or higher) . Select (or a create) a Button in your project. Popup Page or Button. 220 TPDesign4 (v2. Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page.States Tab. 2. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4).Working With Video Fills Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. Alternatively. 3. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. To apply the video fill across all states. Popup Page or Button. In the Properties Control window .States Tab. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab).

Working With Video Fills TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 221 .

Working With Video Fills 222 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

jpg. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard. To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard: 1. and set the sequence of the images.jpg.jpg.e. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project.. Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually. etc. or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections.11 or higher) 223 . the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation. Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. where you can select which images to include in the animation. TPDesign4 (v2. don't mix "1" and "01" or "001"). Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator. This opens the Select Resource dialog. Select Icon to use icons in the animation. Animation Wizard . The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default. Also.Working With Animation Effects Working With Animation Effects Overview TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images Using the Animation Wizard The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually. or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details).Select Type (Step 1 of 6) Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon). The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states.jpg.e. it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files. make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i.. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons. Animation Wizard . cool_button_spin04. cool_button_spin01.Select Type (Step 1 of 6). and set the sequence of the images. click the Add button. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . they will be available via this drop-down list. and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created. would be a very tedious and time-intensive process. by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame. the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i. Ctrl+click to select multiple files. Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation. through the File > Import Resources option.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation Wizard . In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection.). cool_button_spin03. This however. cool_button_spin02. To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence. 2.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation.

3. Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it. If the images were named consecutively. you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. Select the desired position option from the drop-down list. Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1. if you create a multi-state button. and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states. you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state).Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog. a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog. Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard . Animation Wizard . Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .GIF file type. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). and the size of the button that will contain it. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. Animation Wizard . Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary).11 or higher) . you have only two states on the button. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button. and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files). Once extracted.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image.version 7 or higher.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog. and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied. If button states exist beyond the end of the animation. for a ten-frame animation. you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. 224 TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button. So. Obviously. these files can be imported into your TPD4 project. 4. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. and the original GIF animation can be simulated. or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size. Lets say that your sequence has ten frames. The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image. there are also many freeware applications available). If you select Absolute.Working With Animation Effects You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC® 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro . Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image. 5. The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence. For example. if more states are required for the animation. the animation sequence will have more than two frames. 0.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove).Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it. the first state). Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) . Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate.

Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations. you would have to create the button without borders. If creating a icon animation. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software. to make a button fade completely in/out on a page. So. and click Push). Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off. This is called "Animate Time Up". When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard .Appearance (Step 5 of 6) Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style. "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. TPD4 supports multi-state buttons. Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4. A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. 6. Tweening Short for in-betweening. In TPD4. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. and which state to duplicate. This is called "Animate Time Down". and is definable in 1/10th second increments. these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone). Remember. if you create a multi-state button with 256 states. and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). the states will be displayed in reverse order. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. also definable in 1/10th second increments. Animation Wizard .11 or higher) 225 . When the button is turned back Off. Click Finish to generate the animation. The starting state for the animation. you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation.Working With Animation Effects Animation Wizard . tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. including: The number of states to be added to the button. The position of the animation on the button. each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states. these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent"). TPDesign4 (v2. Provided you are not creating an image-based animation. Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview. When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. If creating a bitmap animation. and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. the number of frames in the animation.Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog.Finish (Step 6 of 6) This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation.

However. The color tweeners can be used individually. This is called "Animate Time Down". FIG. This is called "Animate Time Up". Note that the more states you use. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. 207). The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade. these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. When the button is turned back Off. the smoother the transitions will appear. you would have to create the button without a border assignment. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not select the intermediate states). but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog. also definable in 1/10th second increments. With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation. Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States) 2. The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. Fill Color. Border Color. set to RGB colors). When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. the states will be displayed in reverse order. When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. leave the colors the same for the first and last states. An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque. Apply a color (Fill Color. To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color. 3. 226 TPDesign4 (v2. Text Color. since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state that is different from that of the first state (FIG. FIG. 206 Multi-State Button (4 States) To create a fade effect. An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent.Working With Animation Effects Creating Color Transition Effects Use the Border Color.11 or higher) . Text Color and Text Effect Color): 1. 206). and is definable in 1/10th second increments. 205). Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page.

8. Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window. Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute. 6. They must be separated by at least one stage. TPDesign4 (v2. 3. 4. 5. The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. The results are displayed immediately in the State Manager window (FIG. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press. Creating Animated Bitmap Effects Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 5.11 or higher) 227 . Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States) Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/ Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 207 Multi-State Button (4 States) The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last. To create animated bitmap effects with an icon: 1. 7. Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. and select Tweeners from the context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. and you should not select the intermediate states). The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager window. However. 208). Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button.Working With Animation Effects FIG. FIG. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window . In the last state included in the tween. and with different combinations of tweeners. Select (or create a new) multi-state button. 2. 4.States tab).

some of these options may not be available. the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. Overall Opacity . 5. The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. Text Color . bitmap or text must be set to Absolute.This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states. and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager window. Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened. Icon. Bitmap Position . Text. Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window . Text Effect Color .This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states. The options in this menu include: Border Color . Fill Color .Working With Animation Effects To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image.11 or higher) . Tweeners sub-menu Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. 3. Creating Animated Text Effects Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons. Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons.This option will tween the Bitmap. Text Position . Set the Text Justification property to Absolute.States tab). In order to apply motion tweening to an icon. bitmap or text.This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. All Colors . The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button. 7. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. 228 TPDesign4 (v2. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects. In order to apply tweening to an icon.This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states. and you should not select the intermediate states). the justification for the icon. To create animated text effects: 1. Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). Icon Position . Select (or create a new) multi-state button. follow the steps outlined above. For example. bitmap or text. Fill. They must be separated by at least one stage. and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once. The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button.This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states.This option tweens the Border. 2.This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. 6. All Positions . 4.This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. and move it to its end position in the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu).This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states. the justification for the icon.

The Blue channel is not used.This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. the Border Name state property must be set to none. then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. when applied to a button/state. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth. if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. you must be logged into www.11 or higher) 229 . The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages. when used in conjunction with custom palettes. set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. As a result. This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel. the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image. glow and drop-shadow effects. chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which. Refer to the Chameleon Images. some images make more sense and would give better results than others. When the border name is set to none. Requirements for Chameleon Images Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting. then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. Ideally. Chameleon Images TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). To access AMX Tech Notes. When used with multi-state buttons. Furthermore. when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property). One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that.com as a dealer. they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. In other words. Red. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that.Working With Animation Effects Text Size . PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha. When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4. For an example of a chameleon image. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input. and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state.amx. That is. TPDesign4 (v2. Green and Blue). while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning.

2. Export the image as a PNG file. Working With Chameleon Images Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red.Example Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image. In a Design View window. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). 209). 3. It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property). FIG. When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image.11 or higher) . Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button. The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image. since in TPD4.Working With Animation Effects The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are: 1. 2. for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used: 1. Blue. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image: Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images. The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input. 4. Computer Control or TakeNote button types. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. 230 TPDesign4 (v2. create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image. Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog). It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. 209 Working With Chameleon Images Working With Chameleon Images .

Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. For example. In the Chameleon Image property.Fill and Border colors Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings.Working With Animation Effects 5.TPT). and saved as part of the TPD4 project.one color scheme for each design. A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG. the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application.. In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. 6. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . 211 Chameleon Image . The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4. click the browse button (. Custom palettes are created in TPD4.. Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that. Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button. TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG.) to access the Resource Manager dialog.Fill and Border colors tweened In fact. the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools. the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name). Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image. Similarly. Icons. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions. TPDesign4 (v2. set the button's Border Name to None. Chameleon Images. 210 Chameleon Image . Text) make up your button. In the States tab of the Properties Window. Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project). However. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project). Note that at this point. note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property. 211): FIG. 210): FIG.11 or higher) 231 . depending on what elements (Bitmaps.

These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder.11 or higher) . the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements.Working With Animation Effects The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. 232 TPDesign4 (v2.

without opening the file in TPD4. 212).3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.11 or higher) 233 .TP4) file to a specified Master. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master. There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*. 3. select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. the files themselves are routed to the panels. via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect. 1. you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. 4. or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings. Secure NetLinx Connections If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. and select New to create a new communication configuration. 2. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Once they are entered here. where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master).File Transfer Operations File Transfer Operations Overview In TPD4. FIG. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master. To access the Connection Settings dialog. 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled) TPDesign4 (v2. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog.

To recall a saved communication configuration. and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar) Working With Communications Configurations Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself. 215). they will be ignored.11 or higher) . If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect). Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG.File Transfer Operations When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master. FIG. FIG.Connection drop-down list 234 TPDesign4 (v2. The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. 214). 215 Connect dialog . the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied. 214 Connect dialog Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog). See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection. 213): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed. the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog).

Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. 216). TPDesign4 (v2. 6. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Do not change this number. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications. and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog. Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). In the Connection Settings dialog. Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list. 4. FIG. Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. 4. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP. click New to establish a new connection. Serial or Modem.File Transfer Operations To delete a saved configuration. 2. Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected. 1. 3. select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). 216 Connection Settings dialog . Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1. Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed. without having to re-configure. In the Connect dialog. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field).11 or higher) 235 . Connecting to a NetLinx Master Typically. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 2. 3. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. Therefore. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. 212 on page 233). 212 on page 233). Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG.TCP/IP selected as Transport 5. you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected. 7. in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels. Once these steps have been completed. and save multiple connection configurations for easy access.

Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 7. In the Connection Settings dialog. 3.File Transfer Operations Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. Once they are entered here. 1. 236 TPDesign4 (v2. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. 4. click New to establish a new connection. In the Connect dialog. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Data Bits.Serial selected as Transport 5. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog).3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. 9. Stop Bits and Flow control) as needed.11 or higher) . Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. Baud Rate. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. 217). you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. 6. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. 2. 217 Connection Settings dialog . Once these steps have been completed. 8. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 212 on page 233). you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. Parity. 8. without having to re-configure. FIG. Once they are entered here. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Press the Connect button to establish the connection.

TPDesign4 (v2. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. In the Connection Settings dialog. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields.Modem selected as Transport 4. click New to establish a new connection. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. 3. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Once they are entered here. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog).11 or higher) 237 . Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Flow control and Phone #) as needed. Data Bits. 5. 1. Once these steps have been completed. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. Stop Bits. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. Baud Rate. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. without having to re-configure. 218). 212 on page 233). In the Connect dialog. 218 Connection Settings dialog . Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. FIG. 7.File Transfer Operations Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. 6. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port. 2. Parity.

Serial and Modem.11 or higher) . Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. To transfer to a G4 panel. In the Name field. Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). 214 on page 234). file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. the panel files are routed to the panels. This is the name that will b. the panel files are routed to the panels. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration. 238 TPDesign4 (v2. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. d. Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP In TPD4. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. In TPD4. In order to transfer touch panel files. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). In order to transfer touch panel files. Do not change this number. Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. Serial and Modem. c. If you are not already connected to the Master. To use TCP/IP as the transport type: 1. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. the panel files are routed to the panels. select it from the dropdown list. e. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP. via the Connect dialog.01 or higher. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1. In TPD4. verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2.File Transfer Operations Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. Otherwise. enter a name for this communication configuration. via the Connect dialog. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected.

displaying an online device tree. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. the panel files are routed to the panels. Once communication is established.38400 Data Bits . b. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection. Parity. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). enter a name for this communication configuration. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. 5. displaying an online device tree. Panel File Transfers via Serial Port In TPD4. Otherwise. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. Panel ID. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. 3. Once communication is established. and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel. the Connect dialog is invoked. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . verify the IP Address. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting).11 or higher) 239 .none These settings must match those of the selected COM port. (firmware) Version. Description. Data Bits. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu).1 Flow Control . In the Name field. and Manufacturer. If you have already established a serial communication configuration. TPDesign4 (v2.File Transfer Operations 3. d. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Device #. c. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Stop Bits and Flow Control).8 Parity . See the Transfer Options section on page 241. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. To use Serial as the transport type: 1.none Stop Bits . select it from the drop-down list. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. If you are not already connected to the Master. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. 4. Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate. If you encounter a transfer error.

Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. (firmware) Version. the Connect dialog is invoked. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. 3. To refresh the Online Devices Tree.none Stop Bits .File Transfer Operations The online device tree lists the online devices by System #.1 Flow Control . Otherwise. If you have already established a modem communication configuration. Panel File Transfers via Modem In TPD4. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. Stop Bits. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. and Manufacturer. To use Modem as the transport type: 1. Once communication is established. Flow Control and Phone Number).11 or higher) .8 Parity . 5. select it from the dropdown list. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate. Device #. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). d. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. 4. Device #. enter a name for this communication configuration. b. 240 TPDesign4 (v2. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. and Manufacturer. Description.none These settings must match those of the Modem. Parity. Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device. create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. (firmware) Version. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Data Bits. the panel files are routed to the panels. This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu).38400 Data Bits . disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. If you are not already connected to the Master. c. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Description. displaying an online device tree. In the Name field.

Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer.11 or higher) 241 . Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog). Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file.File Transfer Operations 4. 8. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel. which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. 3. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers: 1. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. Any bitmaps. sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel. 6. 5. On the Touch Panel. press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). Select URL as the Connection Mode. since it involves sending many more files. Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. 4. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. 7. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete. since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP: 1. you don't need to use the Full Clean option. 5. you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel. and is not necessary in most cases. In this situation. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers.

3. 4. 2. the panel should appear in the online device tree. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the panel. 10. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. which displays the Host Name and IP address for your PC. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. After several seconds. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection). 2. Once you can see the device online. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices.11 or higher) . 3. you may transfer the files. 2. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. 242 TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. a. Once you can see the panel online. 5. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master). Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog. Write down the IP address.File Transfer Operations 9. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. b. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers. 3. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. To receive files from the panel. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch panel. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of the touch panel. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs.

Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. 2. 5. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. 6. 5. the panel should appear in the online device tree. In this situation. When the Install Driver dialog does appear. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. 4. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). click on the Next buttons. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB: 1. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels: 1. you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel. Driver button. 4. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). select to continue the installation. Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. 3. The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital signature. Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). accepting all the default prompts. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. This is acceptable. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. select the Properties button and then the Update 6. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. 3. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog.File Transfer Operations Receiving Files From The Panel 1. If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically. 2. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. 2. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers: 1. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels After installation of TPD4. Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect).11 or higher) 243 . 7. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. 3. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only). After installation is complete. After several seconds. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. panel.

Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Receiving Files From The Panel 1. you may transfer panel files. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. 2.File Transfer Operations Once you can see the device online. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list.11 or higher) .5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side (depending on the model) of the touch panel. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers. then connect to the panel. 244 TPDesign4 (v2. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1. 3. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 3. 3. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. To receive files from the panel. 2. 2. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. 2. Once you can see the panel online. First plug the USB cable into the PC.

via Windows Network Connections settings: 1. and select Properties from the context menu. To enter a static IP address for the connection. When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer. FIG. This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG. FIG. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog TPDesign4 (v2. Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections .File Transfer Operations MVP-5200i USB Driver The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver. 219 Network Connections dialog 2. Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link".FIG. it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections). you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. 219). It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection.11 or higher) 245 . 220).

5. 221). FIG.11 or higher) . Select Use the following IP address. 221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog 4. 246 TPDesign4 (v2. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the panel. The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address).File Transfer Operations 3. and click on Properties. Click OK to save your changes. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) Properties dialog (FIG.

TPT) Files TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*.VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*. Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog. 222). The buttons and pages can be edited. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. *.TPT). copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project. 222 Example System Page Template TPDesign4 (v2.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*. Working With the System Page Template The System Page Template is a set of pages. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG.Working With Templates Working With Templates Importing Template (*. When you open the System Page Template.VAT or *. When a VAT or TPT template file is imported.VAT or *.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. To import a touch panel template file into TPD4: 1. 2. it is opened in TPD4 as a project file. this could take several minutes. FIG. *. a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded. Depending on the size of the template.11 or higher) 247 . Once the template has been loaded.

and pasted into a Project. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked. once the System Page Template is copied into a Project. you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project. it is fully editable.setup port) by default. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page. You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons. and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. Again. In this case. just like any other page in the Project. the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 . and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix. Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification. Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification.11 or higher) . it is treated like any other page in your project.e. the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel. For example. TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. just like you would for any other page in the Project. Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix. When these pages are pasted into a Project. This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder. "__RGB setup"). System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create. you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters).setup port) by default. 248 TPDesign4 (v2. Once the System Page is pasted into your project. you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page. The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. are always set to the reserved setup port (0 . However. Alternatively. and them paste them into your Project.e. Once you copy the System Page into your project. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. since they always retain their function codes. The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked. if necessary.e. and paste them into any page in your project. "__RGBsetup").Working With Templates The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project. Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page. the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project. Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. "_RGB setup"). the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace.

Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project. System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project.. 2. This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project. you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template. Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project. . Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing. until they are pasted into a Project. for use with telephone connections. and International functionality. but with several additional symbols (-.11 or higher) 249 . Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. However. Similar to the keypad popup page. you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project.Working With Templates 1. since they always retain their function codes. Clear.to a single-underscore prefix (i. The System Popup Pages include: • keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on. "_RGBsetup"). Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page In some cases. and the buttons they contain are locked for editing. Abort and Done buttons). Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project. Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). The pages in the System Page Template. TPDesign4 (v2. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. :. /. the System Page name automatically changes from a double. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project. For example. • keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project.e. and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. Note that once the System Page is pasted into the project. • keypad: • keypadExtend: • keypadPrivate: • keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. they can be modified just like any other button in the project. Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button). you may want to use just the Red. the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project. Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. and they will be fully functional. if necessary. 3. Shift. Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template. In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project. TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. '). You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes. including Caps Lock. you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters). In this case.

This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project. and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project. then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. Touch Input Select. these popup pages and buttons are fully editable. System Page Template Reference The System Page Template is a set of pages. This page contains a Progress Bar. including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security). The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. Bus Blink. etc). The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout. etc). popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. etc). Job Name. Panel Information. This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel. Master Connection. Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds . Protected Setup). TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. To use these pages in your project. This is the Protected ID page. System Page Template Reference • Battery: • Calibrate: • Calibrate Test: • Panel: • Progress: • Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project. Use the Time page to set the system clock. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. remember that once pasted into your Project. Either way. Time Adjustment. • Time: 250 TPDesign4 (v2. When you open the System Page Template.11 or higher) . and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel. containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings. Panel Information. which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number. Version. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). • Protected Sensors: • Resolution: • Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD. However. Revision.single or double-beep). select Edit > Copy. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly. used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations.Working With Templates There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project: 1. • Protected: • Protected ID: • Protected Password: • Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. Baud Rate. Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page. then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Dealer ID. 2. you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. This is the Project Information page. Video/RGB Adjustment. This is the Protected Setup page. This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information. containing the following pages. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name.

This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel. Full Screen Edit. undo changes. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. Saturation and Hue). but with several additional symbols (-. Version and Status text-area buttons. plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4). KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. :. Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). • RGB Setup: • Video Setup: • Volume: System Page Template Popup Pages The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. Status.11 or higher) 251 . Contrast. including Caps Lock. Undo changes. TPDesign4 (v2. Save Settings. KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. for use with telephone connections. . /. plus buttons for returning to default settings. and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values. and International functionality. Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. for text/numeral entries made on the panel.Working With Templates System Page Template Reference (Cont. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version.) • RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red. Green and Blue levels. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. '). This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page. Input and Format). but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness. Clear. Abort and Done buttons).. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page. Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. Shift.

. You must have a main preview image ("[preview].TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name. Also. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects.TPT) file that will be created from this project. G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. 3. On the other hand. According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. Images do not have to be full size. G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups. Start with the Device and Navigation elements first and the Placeholder elements last.TPT) file. 252 TPDesign4 (v2. in fact AMX templates utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template. Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6.). Then. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages.png"). Any number of template files (*. [nav#navName]pageName.. You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard. You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder.jpg" or "[preview]. create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items. Create the preview images for the elements. named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements. then make copies of it. TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). The resolutions and panel types are provided here. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first. but many more panel types. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. the minimum number to make a template family. based on the established elements. etc. 2. 4 items.11 or higher) . where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. 1. popups and buttons. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar. What navigation model are you going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements. Make sure they do not conflict with each other.

A .Example G4 PanelBuilder Template TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 253 . this is the basis of a template family. Not all resolutions have to be done at once. Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point. The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG. FIG. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves. 223). Below is the workspace for TPD4. Repeat the design for other resolutions. do a generate. After you have completed the template design. 223 TPD4 Workspace .Working With Templates 4. 5. if applicable. Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files.TPT file is created and a list of errors and warnings are displayed at this time.

pageName . 224). 254 TPDesign4 (v2. The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. FIG. [item]buttonName buttonName .Required Template Elements When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates. [title]buttonName buttonName .This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button.Required Template Elements The template must have at least one of each of the following elements: Navigation Elements This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time. The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons.Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image. Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName .11 or higher) . The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project. buttonName. Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups. 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates .

pageName .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2.The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.11 or higher) 255 . Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project.Working With Templates navName . The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons. Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button. pageName .The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder.The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and may have optional popups. buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. Placeholder Elements This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area. [title]buttonName buttonName . buttonName .This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.

256 TPDesign4 (v2.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.Optional Template Elements Your templates can have any of the following: Mode Elements This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in. Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . pageName ..e. "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode. [item]buttonName buttonName . Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName . The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information. i.11 or higher) . Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time. Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button." Additionally.Optional Template Elements There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom. 225): FIG. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Mode elements can be associated with rooms.

Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .Working With Templates Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons. Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project. Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information. [title]buttonName buttonName . i.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image. modeName . [item]buttonName buttonName . pageName . buttonName .e.Unused. buttonName .The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.Unused. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2. The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project. Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.11 or higher) 257 . Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.. Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. pageName .The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . Cannot contain pages.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Cannot contain pages. Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName . [title]buttonName buttonName . Splash Elements This element is a popup that can contain an image. buttonName . navName . corporate logo. The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. Sub-Navigation Elements This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.

[title]buttonName buttonName . deviceName .11 or higher) . buttonName .Working With Templates Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button. buttonName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused. pageName .The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. [title]buttonName buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. splashName . buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. there can only be one Feature element in a panel design. Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName . buttonName . pageName . 258 TPDesign4 (v2.e.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Feature Elements This element resembles the Device element.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. pageName . Device Elements This element is the actual device used. Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. However.Unused. buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project. For reference. the "Clean Panel" feature. buttonName . Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image.Unused. Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName . Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName . consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices. Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. i. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project.. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups. Only one Device element can be displayed at a time.

buttonName .Unused. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed.Working With Templates Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button. Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. Sub-Feature Elements This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element. "volume. Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName . featureName . When navigating to a Device. Show any popups for the element.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons. [title]buttonName buttonName . pageName . pageName . The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons.e. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. when applicable. Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template In addition to the template requirements and required elements. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Cannot contain pages. buttonName . pageName .11 or higher) 259 . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. TPDesign4 (v2.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. i.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. subFeatureName . [title]buttonName buttonName . buttonName . buttonName . buttonName .Unused.Unused.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.. buttonName .

" There can only be one preview image per element. For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element.jpg" (or . they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel..jpg. the Sub-Navigation is not shown. then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element. When navigating to a Device.Template Wide Conventions Text Replacement .e. "[device#DVD]. 260 TPDesign4 (v2. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important.11 or higher) .png). when applicable. popup pages are shown in alphabetical order. if not all popup pages should be initially shown. or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. i. Show any popups for the element. Panel Title . Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element.The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain. The main preview image should be named '[preview]. The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes. If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. G4 PanelBuilder Templates . If the Info button is omitted.Working With Templates Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden.A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary. The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters. Otherwise.A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element. Preview Images .

Dual [device#Volume .Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 261 .Dual HVAC . G4 PanelBuilder Templates .AMX Naming Conventions AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates.AMX Naming Convention Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC .Single]Volume .Single]HVAC .Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume .Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template.Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume .Dual]HVAC .Dual [device#HVAC .Dual Volume .

Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar.Navigations as Pages TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote". A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom]. TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only. it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6.VAT) file that will be created from this project.VAT) file. popups and buttons. but 12 different panel types. VA Templates . named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. based on the established elements. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. Then. Any number of template files (*. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth. VA Templates . This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*. 262 TPDesign4 (v2. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*. the minimum number to make a template family.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. The resolutions and panel types are as follows: Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type • MVP-7500 • TPI4 • MVP-8400 • CA12 • CV12 • TPI4 800x480 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 • TPI4 • CV17 According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. Also.11 or higher) .

11 or higher) 263 . or placeholder implementation. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection. Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements. starting with itself. These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn].Logical Page Info Element Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. VA Templates .Logical Page Up and Down Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group.List Box Page Up and Down Elements List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations. feature. A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself). TPDesign4 (v2. There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements. VA Templates . A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device.Working With Templates VA Templates . These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn].

Working With Templates 264 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

system generated filenames are not generated. Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. where you can set general program preferences for TPD4.Program Preferences Program Preferences Overview Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. TPDesign4 (v2. Backup copies and the image library directory. With this option unchecked. Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI.Application tab FIG. 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup. Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed). although the data that makes them up is still saved. Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4.Application tab The items in the Application tab include: Startup Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position.11 or higher) 265 . 226 Preferences Dialog . Preferences Dialog . "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files. Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings.

Pages tab) on application startup. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. With this option unchecked. without saving any changes. Warning Messages When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator . Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). but will take effect the next time you open a project file. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. 266 TPDesign4 (v2. the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. State Manager.Program Preferences If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed. Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply. and Button Preview). depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images. Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. Click Apply to apply any changes. With this option unchecked. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages. Miscellaneous Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled. which is a much slower operation. the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation.11 or higher) . Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled). The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View. if a name conflict occurs. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. If an image is not found in the in-memory cache. it must be loaded again from disc. Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially. by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file.

You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar. or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page. This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .11 or higher) 267 . For example. TPDesign4 (v2.see below). Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area.Appearance tab FIG. you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field . 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size. this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel. To use this option. 227 Preferences Dialog . Fit Width.Appearance tab The items in the Appearance tab include: Window Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows. most 21" monitors typically have between a 19. Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above). and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area). Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows. Fit Height) from the drop-down list.5" and 20" viewable area. Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image. Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors. Default = enabled. Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments).

Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent. the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). Small. Click Apply to apply any changes. Transparency Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency. 268 TPDesign4 (v2. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above). shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. changing the checkerboard style to different sizes. Grid Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent. The range is 4 . Dark and Custom. Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). in the State Manager when a state is transparent. Dashed Line or Dots). The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled. In certain situations. This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. Medium. without saving any changes. The options are Light. Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid.11 or higher) . The options are Tiny. the default setting is 8.255.Program Preferences The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program. If Custom is selected. then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists. Medium and Large. via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows.

.Directories tab The items in the Directories tab include: Default Directories Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*. where you can navigate to an alternative folder. 228 Preferences Dialog . Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.TP4 Backup files. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog.) to open the Browse For Folder dialog. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings.. Click the browse button (.Directories tab FIG. Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *. TPDesign4 (v2.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files. 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.TP4). where you can navigate to an alternative folder. without saving any changes. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click the browse button (.. This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space. In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled..11 or higher) 269 .

and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4.Editor Selection tab FIG.Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected). Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor. The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor.With an editor selected (in the Editors list). you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button.Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added. 270 TPDesign4 (v2. to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project. Add Editor button .Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Remove Editor button . click this button to remove it from the list.11 or higher) . 229 Preferences Dialog . by filename (*.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .Editor Selection tab The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files.EXE and file path. The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu . Editors table .

Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500). By default. this option is selected. 230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.Undo/Redo tab The items in the Undo/Redo tab include: Undo / Redo Support Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions. without saving any changes. even they have been closed since that action was performed.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . this option is selected. if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed. Click Apply to apply any changes.11 or higher) 271 . Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. For example. By default. 230 Preferences Dialog . Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.Undo/Redo tab FIG. Change selection on Undo: When enabled. TPDesign4 (v2. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history. the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation.

and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. 272 TPDesign4 (v2.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG.Program Preferences Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files.EXE) file. in the Open dialog. 2. in the Open dialog. FIG. 3.EXE) file. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog.Editor Selection tab Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu.11 or higher) . Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu. 231). Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. Click the Browse button (. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog.. 4. 4.. 231). If you add additional programs to the list.. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1.) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. 3. 231 Preferences dialog .. 2. Click the Browse button (.

Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog. 2. TPDesign4 (v2. and open the Editor Selection tab. 4. 232 Preferences dialog . FIG. 5. 3. If you add additional programs to the list. Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor dialog. This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default).Program Preferences FIG. Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: 1. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected) 5.Editor Selection tab The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors) from the drop-down menu.11 or higher) 273 . Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. 233).

Command tab Customizing the Toolbars Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. 4. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands.Program Preferences The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. along with their associated toolbar icon. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 3. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands).11 or higher) . and release the mouse button. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar. While holding the mouse-button down. 5. Select a command category (under Categories). The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar. 235). drag the command/icon to a toolbar. 235 Customize dialog . regardless of category. 234). FIG. 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table Customizing the Menus and Toolbars Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. 2. Alternatively. to the Commands tab. Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar). 274 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. if one exists. 6.

Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). Click OK. In the Button Appearance dialog. Alternatively. For toolbar buttons. Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG. right-click on a menu item (FIG. 6. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars. as long as the Customize dialog is open. 5. FIG. For menu items. select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not allow you to associate an icon). 237 Button Appearance dialog 4. 236 Customizing menu items 3. drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. you can associate an icon with the command: 1. FIG.11 or higher) 275 . Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. 2. 3. 236). right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the context menu.Program Preferences Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1. 237). TPDesign4 (v2. Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar. Select Delete to delete the button. 2. you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu. Associating an Icon With a New Command Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 4. While holding the mouse button down.

238 on page 276). 4. and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. FIG. FIG. 239). Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands). Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list. 8. Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG.11 or higher) . With the empty toolbar in place. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. 7. 239 Toolbar Name dialog 3. 240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar Renaming Custom Toolbars 1. 6. 276 TPDesign4 (v2. 240). Click the New button. Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar. FIG. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. in an empty area near the other toolbars. The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list. 238 Customize dialog . 2. 239). 238). Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK. Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position. 3. Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. 5.Toolbars tab 2. along with an empty new toolbar icon.

4. 241). drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). drag the command/icon to the open menu. Alternatively. to the Commands tab (FIG. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). FIG. 3. and release the mouse button. 241 Customize dialog . 2. 2. While holding the mouse-button down. 6. you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu. The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu.Adding Commands To Existing Menus 4. TPDesign4 (v2. 3.11 or higher) 277 . 3. regardless of category (FIG. 2. Customizing the Menus Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1.Program Preferences Deleting Custom Toolbars To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace: 1. as long as the Customize dialog is open. if one exists. Open the Customize dialog. Select Delete to delete the button. 7. along with their associated toolbar icon. While holding the mouse button down. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu. Alternatively. Select a command category (under Categories). Click to select a custom toolbar. 5. Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. 235 on page 274). Open the Customize dialog.

244). 2. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 4. FIG. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 8.11 or higher) . right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu. 3. and select Button Appearance. Open the Customize dialog. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG. 243). to the Commands tab (FIG.Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Menu 1. 242 Customize dialog . Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK. To name the new menu. Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new menu (FIG. FIG.Creating a New Custom Menu This item represents a new "empty" menu. 7. This opens the Button Appearance dialog. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list (FIG. 245). Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu. 6. drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar (FIG. 242). 278 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. 235 on page 274). While holding the mouse button down. Select New Menu from the Categories list. FIG. 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location 5.

. The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu. 4. if necessary. click the browse button (. Specify an Initial Directory. 246 Customize dialog . TPDesign4 (v2.Program Preferences Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu: 1.EXE file in the Open dialog. Enter a name for the application. 6. 7. 246).Toolbars tab 2. New (Insert) button FIG. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG. Next to the Command field. Specify any Arguments. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box. if necessary. 3.) to locate and select the application's. 5. Click Close to close the Customize dialog.. as you want it to appear in the Tools menu. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list.11 or higher) 279 .

sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4. 4. To remove a hotkey assignment. 2. To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings. 247 Customize dialog . and click Remove. as opposed to the minus key in the main key set.Keyboard tab 1. The information in this dialog is read-only. Choose a command in the Commands list.Program Preferences Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) Hotkeys. 3. always use the number pad on your keyboard. 280 TPDesign4 (v2. click Reset All. or to modify existing ones (FIG. select the command in the Commands list. 5. Open the Customize dialog. Setting Custom Hotkeys Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators). Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item. Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu. then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list.11 or higher) . Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command. If you assign the minus key (-). Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field. but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change. 247): FIG. You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). to the Keyboard tab.

11 or higher) 281 .Program Preferences TPDesign4 (v2.

0193 • 469. All rights reserved.Take Control™ 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE. . AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.com 9/09 ©2009 AMX. TX 75082 USA • 800. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.222.amx.624. RICHARDSON.It’s Your World .932.6993 technical support • www.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful